Air Travel Essay Example Pdf

Critically analyse and evaluate the impact of aviation on society

Introduction

The aviation industryhas dramatically changed the world we live in and has had a huge impact on almost all societies around the world. Since the first flight of the ‘Kity Hawk’ in 1903, aviation has developed at a surprising rate and has become a major component of the developed countries and their respective economies. This essay will discuss the impact of aviation on the society, along with the evaluating its positive and negative influences on the mankind. Furthermore, this essay will discuss the environmental, social and economic impact of aviation in conjunction with its contribution on globalisation.

Transformation from a local industry to global economic beneficiary

Even well into the twentieth century, most people only ever travelled short distances; it was only the rich people who enjoyed the luxury of traveling great distances in short time. However, the advent of commercial aviation has opened the doors for the less privileged as well, and now a larger number of people can travel to greater distances in the shortest possible time (Airbus, 2008). With the expansion of the commercial aviation sector, it is increasinglybecoming a cheape rmeans of travelling. Inrecent decades, the phenomenon of budget airlines has enabled many morepeople to fly (Whitelegg, 2008). Furthermore, the aviation sector has also provided the grounds forthe global tourism industry to develop. The modern tourism industry is unthinkable without aviation. This is because, nowadays, it is a common practice amongst people to travel by air quite frequently for business or pleasure.Thus, increased tourismhelps in generating more and more job opportunities, which in turn improves the global economy. One of the most prominent impacts of aviation is that it has revolutionised the way in which goods and people are moved around the world (Pew, 2009). Earlier, transportation was a hassle as it was time consuming. With aviation, people now have a securer and faster alternative to travel or transport their goods. The other major benefit of aviation is its profound impact on the economy (Pew, 2009). It has also facilitated the development of industries and businesses,resulting in a great boost in economic activities and trade (Pew, 2009). The transport of freight by air has also increased greatlyin the recent decades. The goods that are being manufactured in one country are now easily transported in shorter periods of time to another country (FAA, 2005). For example a product made in Manchester can now be shipped anywhere in the world, in no time. The growth of air freight hasalsocreated many opportunities for businesses- it has allowed them to export to markets that were previously not preferred due to the long distances and the subsequent costsincurred (FAA, 2005). Air freight has led to a boost in trade all over the world andhas greatly improvedthe economy of underdeveloped countries. It has also contributed to the growing globalisationof economic activities. This is the reason behind the increasing interdependency of world economies.It has also led to an increase in the productivity of various industries (Gazzard, 2009) which again, helps in the generation of wealth, subsequently benefitting the members of the society (Whitelegg, 2008).

The following sections will present some of the specific major benefits of the aviation industry which derive from the improvements it has made to transport and industry noted above.

A Source of FDI

A highly prominent feature of the modern economy is that, large multinational companies are now investing around the world. This is known as Foreign Direct Investment (FDI). The importance of FDI is recognised by many governments and is one of the leading drivers of the world economy (PTI, 2012).The opportunity created by the aviation industry has greatly facilitated the rise of FDI (Globenet, 2007). Thus,multinational companies usually have a preference of locating their investments near international airports (Whitelegg, 2008).

Employment opportunities

‘Aviation is a fast growing sector of the economy’(Whitelegg, 2008). The aviation industry, despiteitstechnological advances, is still very labour-intensive. A number of international airlines have developed their offices in various cities, providing full-fledged services of transportation. Thus, it has a pivotal role in the growth of the local economies in that it provides job opportunities to a large number of people (Whitelegg, 2008).

Levies

Many governments invest heavily in airports in order to help the aviation industry (Whitelegg, 2008). Apart from benefitting the local people, this sector also pays taxes, which are in turn spent by the government in the provision of services ranging from education to health (Bridges, 2012). The aviation industry is also heavily subsidised by governments in the form of direct subsidies and tax breaks.The fuel that the various airlinesuse is also subsidised through tax breaks. Governments subsidise the aviation industry in the belief that it helps to generate economic growth (Holliday et. al, 2002). While this may be the case in a few situations,the money used by governments to subsidise the aviation industry could be better spent on other infrastructure projects as well. However, the investment needed to create jobs in the aviation industry is very high and this same investment couldbe successful in producing even more jobs if invested in other areas of the economy.

Globalisation

Perhaps the most important trend in the modern world is globalisation. It is the increasing inter-connectedness of the world on an economic, social, political and cultural level. It has made the world smaller, and now some haveevenspoken of a ‘Global Village’ (Hopkins, 2002). The aviation industry has played a crucial role in the process of globalisation. Aviation has helped societies come closer. With the development of aviation, peoplecan travel more freely. This has helped to promote migration and the exchange of ideas--- two very important factors ofglobalisation which will be discussed in the following two sections (IATA, 2008).

Source of Non-Monetary & Intangible benefits

People from different parts of the world, with different views and ideas, now traverse across the world. It has for example, allowed people to study and work in places far away from their native places. It has allowed people from different regions to come together and attend conferences and meetings. This easy movement of people brings new ideas and thoughts into an existing environment and culture. The exchange of ideas is very important, as it facilitates the creation of a more liberal and open society, and it is no longer possible for a society to stop entering those ideas into the society. Rather, it is exposed to the beliefs, values and cultures of other societies as well(Hopkins, 2002, p. 13). Aviation has opened up the world and possibly made societies more tolerant of differences and minorities.

Migration opportunities

With aviation,travel has become cheaper and easier (Kirby, 2008). This has greatly increased migration throughout the world. The modern world has witnessed unprecedented levels of migration. Migration has always been asignificantfeature of human life. People have always travelled long distances in the search for security and resources (Hopkins, 2002). Mass migration is a controversial issue. Many believe that an influx of usually younger and skilled people into a society is of real economic benefit (Kirby, 2008). Their energy and knowledge allows an economy to be more productive and efficient. Many businesses seek highly qualified migrants and it is widely believed that the ageing societies of Western Europe need immigrants in order to maintain their living standards (Crouch, 2004).Migration greatly increases the wealth of a nation as it can bring knowledgeable people which adds to the talent base and human capital of a country. However, migration also brings with it problems such as shortage of housing, and mass migration may produce tensions between immigrants and natives (IATA, 2007). The modern aviation industry has just fuelled this practice even more. This has had huge consequences for society. Many western societies are now of a cosmopolitan nature. They are now home to very many nationalities and ethnic groups who have brought with them their culture and way of life.

Disadvantages of Aviation

Along with the great number of benefits,the aviation industry also brings some inconveniences, in the way that it creates a negative impact on the environment (Lehrer, 2001). The aviation industry generally has a local and a global impact upon the environment (Bridger, 2013). According to Panner (et. al, 2001), the rapid economic development of the globe in recent decades, has led to the degradation of the environment. It has led to worries over the rapid depletion of scarce natural resources, pollution and global warming (Penner et. al, 2001). These environmental challenges are perhaps the most important issues facing modern societies. The planes and airports have adversely impacted upon local environments and the quality of life of those who live in these environments (Lehrer, 2001). There is usually traffic congestion around airports.Aviation has madelife very difficult for some localities in society, especially those located near busy airports as there is the problem of noise pollution. The adverse effects of noise pollution upon individuals have been recognised by the World Health Organisation in recentyears (Whitelegg, 2008). The noise pollution caused by aircraft taking off and landing at airports has been proven to have a negative longterm health impact on people. Furthermore, modern aircrafts generate greenhouse gases likecarbon. These greenhouse gases have been proven to have a highly degrading impact upon the environment (Weele, 1999). Green house gases stay in the atmosphere and lead to global warming. Global warming in turn leads to climate change and this in the long term could have cataclysmic consequences for humanity (Weele, 1999). It could lead to the seas rising, drought and an increase in the frequency of extreme weather. The aviation industry has been proven to be a major emitter of greenhouse gases, which could lead to the catastrophe of global warming (Bridger, 2013). However, it must be noted that the impact of the aviation industry on the environment has been disputed. In recent years the aviation industry has tried to appear to be environmentally friendly (Bridger, 2013). It has issued reports and surveys which seek to prove that aviation is not as harmful to the environment, contrary to what many believe (EC, 2014). On balance, however, the evidence suggests that the aviation industry is a major polluter of greenhouse gases and therefore is a major contributor to climate change (Hepworth &Ducatel, 1992).

Conclusion

Aviation has helped transform many societies around the globe. It has had a huge impact upon every society. While many of the changes have been good, some have been negative. Aviation has, by and large, helped to drive the global economy by allowing the free movement of goods and people (Hopkins, 2002). It has also changed modern societies by facilitating mass migration. The modern world has been shaped by aviation. However, the environmental impact of aviation can not be ignored. The local environmental impact of aviation is certainly harmful to those who live near airports (Whitelegg, 2008). However, aviation’s potential to damage the global environment is of major concern. As a major greenhouse gas emitter, aviation is contributing to the process of global warming, which could have disastrous consequences for humanity. While the aviation sector has,overall, been a real benefit for societies around the world, there needs to be somemajor changes- it must be genuinely environmentally friendly. There may also be a need to re-think the economic benefits of aviation to society, to take into account the environmental costs of the industry to society. The industry needs to be part of an overall plan for global sustainable development that includes development that does not harm the environment or lead toany sort of negative climate change. This sector should, without delay, look into its shortcomings and try and look for constructive solutions, before it becomes too late.  

Reading List/Bibliography

Airbus (2008). Flying On Alternative Fuels (May 22). Airbus - Environment articles.https://www.airbus.com/en/corporate/ethics/environment/articles/08_05_22_alternative_fuels.html [Accessed August 10, 2014] Bridger, Rose (2013) The Plane Truth: Aviations real impact on people and the environment. Pluto Press: New York. Bridges. (2012). Washington-Brussels Tension Grows Over Aviation Emissions Levy. Available: https://www.ictsd.org/bridges-news/bridges/news/washington-brussels-tension-grows-over-aviation-emissions-levy. Last accessed 10th Aug 2014. Crouch, Tom (2004) Wings: a history of aviation from kites to the space age. W.W. Norton: London. Capoccitti, S., Khare, A., & Mildenberger, U. (2010). Aviation Industry - Mitigating Climate Change Impacts through Technology and Policy. Aviation Industry - Mitigating Climate Change Impacts through Technology and Policy, 5(2). Retrieved August 10, 2014, from https://www.scielo.cl/scielo.php?pid=S0718-27242010000200006&script=sci_arttext European Commision. (2014). Reducing emissions from aviation.Available: https://ec.europa.eu/clima/policies/transport/aviation/index_en.htm. Last accessed 10th Aug 2014. FAA. (2014). Emissions and Dispersion Modeling System (EDMS). Available: https://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/apl/research/models/edms_model/. Last accessed 10th Aug 2014. Gazzard, J. (2009). Bio-fuelled or Bio-fooled?Aviation and the Environment.Aviation Environment Federation.https://www.aef.org.uk/uploads/Bio_fuelled_or_bio_fooled_article__2_.pdf [Accessed August 10, 2014] Greenair (2008). International Aviation Emissions Now Firmly On the Post-Kyoto Climate Talks Agenda (April 10). GreenAir Online.com News. https://www.greenaironline.com/news.php?viewStory=146 [Accessed August 10, 2014] Greenshies (no date).Climate Change - Aviation Emissions an Ignored but Fast Growing Problem. https://www.aef.org.uk/downloads/Factsheetclimate.pdf [Accessed August 10, 2014] Hepworth, M. and Ducatel, K. (1992) Transport and the Information Age. London: Bellhaven. Hopkins, A.G. (ed.). (2002) Globalisation in World History.London:Pimlico House. Holliday, J. C., Schmidheiny, S., & Watts, P. (2002).Walking the Talk - The Business Case or Sustainable Development. Sheffield, UK: Greenleaf Publishing Ltd. IATA (2007). IATA calls for a Zero Emissions Future. IATA Press Release No. 21 (June 4). IATA Pressroom. Vancouver. https://www.iata.org/pressroom/pr/2007-06-04-02.htm [Accessed February 16, 2009] Kirby, A. (2008). CCCC Kick The Habit a UN Guide to Climate Neutrality. UNEMG UNEP/GRID-Arendal. https://www.greeningtheblue.org/sites/default/files/KickTheHabit_en_lr.pdf [Accessed August 10, 2014] Lehrer, J. (2001). Scientists seek to minimize CO2 impact. Online Focus (August 6).https://www.pbs.org/newshour/bb/environment/july-dec01/co2_8-6.html [Accessed February 12, 2009] Michiel van Weele. (1999). Measuring and modelling the effects of aviation on the atmosphere. Available: https://www.knmi.nl/research/climate_chemistry/information/aviation/. Last accessed 10th Aug 2014. Penner, J. E., H.Lister, D., Griggs, D. J., Dokken, D. J., & McFarland, M. (2001).Aviation and the Global Atmosphere.IPCC GRID-Arendal. https://www.grida.no/publications/other/ipcc_sr/ [Accessed August 10, 2014] PEW, G. (2009). Airline Alternative Fuel Trials, General Dynamic's Green Jet Engine. AV Web - AVFlash News (January 31). https://www.avweb.com/avwebflash/news/alternative_fuel_biofuel_jet_engine_199681-1.html [Accessed August 10, 2014] Whitelegg, John (2008) Aviation the social, economic and environmental impact of flying. London: Ashden Trust.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Air Travel Essay Example Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Learning through Play for Child Development

Introduction

"Play is essential to development because it contributes to the cognitive, physical, social and emotional well-being of children and youth" (Ginsberg, 2007, p. 182). Play is so important to children's development is that it has been recognised as being of vital importance by the United Nations (1989), as it makes a contribution to the holistic development of children, allowing them to discover the world through experimenting within the various environments to which they are exposed (Bruce, 1996). Ginsberg (2007) makes the observation that all those involved with children's development, learning and education must consider every factor which has the potential to interfere with children realising their full potential, and to work towards ensuring that every child has access to circumstances which allow them opportunities to reap the benefits that are linked with play. The aim of this essay is to investigate the notion of play in the light of learning theories, in order to determine its importance in children's development during their early years.

Definition of Play

It is important to recognise that it is difficult to give a single definition of play (Lillemyr, 2009) and that it is regarded as an all embracing term (Bruce, 1991) which describes a diverse range of behaviours which see children interacting with each other (Dunn, 1993) in order to make sense of, and to enhance their understanding of, the environments in which they find themselves (Bruce, 1996; Wood, 2004). Play can be regarded as the means through which children are able to discover things about the world in order to amend their vision of it (Oko, 1987, p. 44 in Bozena, 2007, p. 80), as well as an avenue through which children can experience joy and/or recreation (Buhler, 1993, p. 91 in Bozena, 2007, p. 80). Play is an opportunity for children to develop a sense of self as a result of solving problems within their environment, which allows them to enhance their cognitive skills in the context of specific cultural environment/environments (Dunn, 1993; Meadows, 1993; Bruce, 1996; Gallahue and Ozman, 1998; Wood, 2004; Robson, 2006). Froebel (cited in Bruce, 2004, p. 132) believes that it provides children with opportunities to utilise their newly accumulated knowledge in different situations which encourages them to adopt flexible attitudes and ways of thinking, as well as providing them with opportunities to practice and understand societal 'norms' and their role in specific environments (Rogoff, 2003). Play also affords children the opportunity to discover the difference between fantasy and reality, safety and risk, order and anarchy and to grasp the concept of potential in themselves for the future (Wood and Attfield, 2005). It is a vital component in children's physical, social, emotional and intellectual development (Elkind, 2008) which allows children to utilise their imagination whilst enhancing their communication skills through engaging in a number of different roles, depending upon their environment and the environment in which any specific interaction is taking place (Eddington, 2004).

Value/Importance for Development

The value and importance of play is the motivation behind recent developments with regard to Early Years education in the form of the Early Years Foundation Stage (EYFS) documentation (Department for Education [DfE], 2014). The notion of child centred education is built upon the acknowledgement that every individual child is unique and is entitled to have their needs met through the careful design of activities which allow them to develop commensurate with their ability, as a result of encouraging positive relationships with all around them in order that learners become competent, self-confident and self-reliant people (DfE, 2014). The ability to communicate is critical to children's development - the government stipulate that those responsible for providing children's education must create opportunities for children to acquire language and communication skills through play, such that they are able to express themselves in a variety of different ways (language, gesture) and they are able to accumulate information as a result of reading and listening to others (DfE, 2014). This stipulation is a direct result of the Rose Report (2009), which highlighted the fact that curriculum provision should have explicit reference to the purposes of play and that the activities designed to promote it should be meticulously planned. Rose (2009) also stressed that children needed to engage not only in individual play but also in paired/group activities, so that language development and acquisition could be encouraged whilst simultaneously learning to cooperate with each other (endorsed by Coates & Thomson, 2009) and developing an understanding of the value of good behaviour. It is vital for practitioners to recognise that play is not some form of break from the curriculum; it is an opportunity for children to develop their physical and cognitive abilities for the 21st century (Moyles, 2010) and is an authentic means of implementing the school curriculum (Action Alliance for Children, 2007; Moyles, 2010).

The notion that play enables children to enhance the skills is put forward by Hughes (2006), who contends that there are a large number (up to 16) of different types of play, including movement and discovery which involves the exploration of the environment and the use of language (endorsed by Ginsberg, 2007; Singer et al., 2006; Bateson, 2005). Other scholars such as Manning-Morton and Thorp (2003) and Burghardt (2005) emphasise the multipurpose nature of play in that children are able to use play as a means for learning through practising skills for the future, tackling and solving problems, as well as a means through which they develop their methods of communicating with those around them. A critical factor in any child's development is feeling safe within the boundaries of any environment to which they are exposed; a number of writers (Moore and Russ, 2006; Russ, 2004; Sayeed and Guerin, 2000) allude to the fact that children must feel safe and relaxed in order to play with freedom and that play in itself allows children to relax, which has a beneficial effect on their emotional outlook (Russ, 2004).

This 'safety' element can be achieved through practitioners building upon children's experiences within the home environment, which can then lead on to opportunities for progression and extension through challenge (Department for Children, Schools and Families [DCSF], 2009). Critical to the learning process is the careful design of activities which take advantage of children's innate ability to enjoy play and the fact that playing "engages children's bodies, minds and emotions" (DCSF, 2009, p. 10). Furthermore, through this process children are able to learn the skills associated with successful interaction with others in order to be part of a community, to experience and to manage their feelings/emotions and to develop confidence in themselves and their abilities (DCSF, 2009). Play provides opportunities for children to develop positive attitudes towards learning, in that they are able to develop their interests, be creative and experimental, to be critically thoughtful (Trevlas et al, 2003; Hurvitz, 2003) as well as developing resilience and the ability to work alongside others as a part of the educative process (DCSF, 2009).

Play and Learning Theory

The most important point about play is that it is active in nature. This active pursuit of knowledge was stressed by Piaget, who emphasised children's ability to construct their own knowledge as individuals (Moore, 2000) through exploring their environment (Phillips and Soltis, 1998) in order to make sense of it (Wyse, 2004). Having scientifically studied children (May, 2013), Piaget put forward the notion that children develop in distinctive stages - sensorimotor (birth to 2 years), preoperational (2 to 6 years), concrete operational (7 to adolescence) and formal operational (adolescence to adulthood) - and that play becomes more complex as learners mature (for example, sensorimotor/practice play, preoperational/symbolic, pretend and fantasy play [Krause et al., 2003]). He also stated that as children came upon new experiences and knowledge, they added them to their existing knowledge base (assimilation) prior to being able to employ this new knowledge (accommodation), thus enhancing their cognitive abilities (Curtis and O'Hagen, 2003). Piaget (1973) believed that children were only able to gain a true understanding of knowledge as a result of this process of discovery, which enables them to be innovative and flexible as opposed to learning in a mechanistic way. These constructivist principles were shared by Vygotsky, although his emphasis was on social and collective learning as opposed to learning as an individual. It was his belief that interaction with others was a key element in enabling children to learn (Buchan, 2013, Daly et al., 2004), and that learning was a social process.

Vygotsky contended that the development of children's communication and language skills relied upon their being allowed to experience the world around them in the company of others in a social context, which lead learners to an understanding of how to behave and how to control themselves in specific contexts (John-Steiner et al., 2010). This social aspect of learning is borne out by observations of children who imitate the actions of others without understanding, until such time as they are able to initiate actions for themselves [which is indicative of their level of comprehension] (Vygotsky, 1978). Vygotsky took this notion of learning from others a stage further when he stated that there was a difference between what children are able to do alone and what they can achieve with the help of more experienced others, labelling this difference the 'Zone of Proximal Development' [ZPD] (Pound, 2005). He firmly believed that every interactive process in which learners engage, irrespective of the environment in which it takes place, provides them with opportunities to develop their language and thinking skills (Whitehead, 2010). Furthermore, Vygotsky (1978) commented that play was the best and most effective means of preschool development as it enabled children to develop their skills through interaction.

Play and Current Early Years Practice

As highlighted above, the current provision as laid out within the EYFS (DfE, 2014) documentation places the child at the centre of the learning process with a specific emphasis on play, which encourages the development of communication, language and literacy skills. There are three prime areas of learning (communication and language, physical development, personal, social and emotional development) and four specific areas which supplement the prime areas (literacy, mathematics, understanding the world and expressive arts and design). It is the responsibility of individual practitioners, and indeed settings in general, to consider the individual needs and stage of development for each individual in their care. Activities within classrooms must be planned to ensure equality of access for all, irrespective of their background or ability and they should be designed to engage learners in purposeful play which is both child initiated and adult led. The balance between these two types of play is of extreme importance. Children can learn by leading their own play and allowing their needs and interests to guide their activities. However, whilst responding to individual children in a positive and warm manner, it is critical that there is a gradual movement towards activities which are more adult led, in order to prepare them for more formal learning as they enter Year 1 (DfE, 2014). Play should provide children with opportunities to explore and express their feelings, to develop relationships with others, to make decisions, choices and errors whilst being respected and valued as individuals; they need to be encouraged to develop self-discipline whilst retaining their ability to be imaginative and creative in solving problems (Bruce, 1987 cited in Early Years Interboard Panel, n.d., p. 7)

Conclusion

Play is central to the development of children in their early years. It provides a platform through which children are able to learn about themselves and the world around them through interacting with it. It allows children to have fun while they are learning, and to engage with those around them as a part of the process of learning, which not only deepens their knowledge base but also provides them with life skills such as the ability to communicate and work effectively with others. Play has been recognised as a central element within the education system which allows children to blossom through interacting with and learning from those around them. It is "… essential for children's development, building their confidence as they learn to explore, to think about problems, and to relate to others" (DfE, 2014, p. 9).

References

  1. Action Alliance for Children (2007)
  2. Play in the Early Years: Key to School Success. A Policy Brief. Oakland, CA: Early Childhood Funders Bateson, P. P. G. (2005)
  3. 'The Role of Play in the Evolution of Great Apes and Humans.' in Pellegrini, A., Smith, P. (Eds) (2005)
  4. The Nature of Play: Great Apes and Humans London: Guildford Press pp. 13 26 Bozena, M. (2007)
  5. 'Exploratory Play and Cognitive Ability.' in Jambor, T.; Van Gils, J. (Eds) Several Perspectives on Children's Play Scientific Reflections for Practitioners Antwerp: Garant Publishers pp. 79 104 Bruce, T. (1991)
  6. Time to Play in Early Childhood Education. London: Hodder & Stoughton Bruce, T. (1996)
  7. Helping Young Children to Play. London: Hodder & Stoughton Bruce, T. (2004) Developing Learning in Early Childhood. London: Sage Buchan, T. (2013) The Social Child. Laying the Foundations of Relationships and Language. Abingdon: Routledge Burghardt, G. M. (2005)
  8. The Genesis of Animal Play: Testing the Limits Cambridge, MA: MIT Press Coates, D., Thomson, W. (2009)
  9. 'Using Learning Stories in the Early Years Foundation Stage.' in Palaiologou, I. (Ed) (2009)
  10. The Early Years Foundation Stage: Theory and Practice London: Sage pp. 118 131 Curtis, A., O'Hagan, M. (2003) Care and Education in Early Childhood: A Student's Guide to Theory and Practice. London: Routledge Falmer Daly, M., Byers, E., Taylor, V. (2004)
  11. Early Years Management in Practice. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers Department for Children, Schools and Families [DCSF] (2009)
  12. Learning, Playing and Interacting: Good Practice in the Early Years Foundation Stage. Nottingham: DCSF Department for Education (2014)
  13. Statutory Framework for the Early Years Foundation Stage: Setting the standards for learning, development and care for children from birth to five. London: Department for Education Dunn, J. (1993)
  14. Young Children's Close Relationships: Beyond Attachment. London: Sage Early Years Interboard Panel (n.d.) Learning Through Play in the Early Years. Retrieved 8th September 2015 from https://www.nicurriculum.org.uk/docs/foundation_stage/learning_through_play_ey.pdf Edgington, M. (2004)
  15. The Foundation Stage Teacher in Action: Teaching in 3, 4 and 5 Year Olds. (3rd Ed) London: Paul Chapman Elkind, D. (2008) The Power of Play: How Spontaneous, Imaginative Activities Lead to Happier, Healthier Children. Cambridge, MA: De Capo Lifelong Gallahue, D. L., Ozmun, J. C. (1998)
  16. Understanding Motor Development: Infants, Children, Adolescents, Adults. Boston, MA: WCB/McGraw-Hill Ginsburg, K. R. (2007)
  17. 'The Importance of Play in Promoting Healthy Child Development and Maintaining Strong Parent Child Bonds.' Paediatrics 119 (1), pp. 182 191 Hughes, B. (2006)
  18. Playtypes: Speculations and Possibilities. London: London Centre for Playwork Education and Training Hurwitz, S. C. (2003)
  19. 'To Be Successful 'Let Them Play!' Child Education, 79 (2), pp. 101 102 John-Steiner, V., Cathrene Connery, M., Marjanovic-Shane, A. (2010)
  20. 'Dancing with the Muses: An Cultural-historical Approach to Play, Meaning Making and Creativity.' in Cathrene Connery, M., John-Steiner, V., Marjanovic-Shane, A. (Eds) Vygotsky and Creativity: A Cultural-historical Approach to Play, Meaning Making, and the Arts New York: Peter Lang Publishing Inc pp. 3 16 Krause, K. L., Bochner, S., Duchesne, S. (2003)
  21. Educational Psychology for Learning and Teaching. Southbank Vic: Thomson Lillemyr, O. F. (2009)
  22. Taking Play Seriously. Charlotte: Information Age Publishing Inc Manning-Morton, J., Thorp, M. (2003) Key Times for Play: The First Three Years. Maidenhead: Open University Press May, P. (2013) The Thinking Child: Laying the Foundations of Understanding and Competence. Abingdon: Routledge Meadows, S. (1993) The Child as Thinker. London: Routledge Moore, A. (2000) Teaching and Learning: Pedagogy, Curriculum and Culture. London: Routledge Moore, M., Russ, S. (2006)
  23. 'Pretend Play as a Resource for Children: Implications for Pediatricians and Health Professionals.' Journal of Developmental and Behavioural Pediatrics 27 (3), pp. 237 248 Moyles, J. (Ed) (2010)
  24. The Excellence of Play (3rd Ed) Maidenhead: Open University Press Robson, S. (2006)
  25. Developing Thinking and Understanding in Young Children. London: Routledge Phillips, D. C; Soltis, J. F. (1998)
  26. Perspectives on Learning. (3rd Ed) New York: Teachers College Press Piaget, J. (1973) Main Trends in Psychology. London: George Allen & Unwin Pound, L. (2005)
  27. How Children Learn: From Montessori to Vygotsky - Educational Theories and Approaches Made Easy. London: Step Forward Publishing Rogoff, B. (2003) The Cultural Nature of Human Development. Oxford: Oxford University Press Rose, J. (2009)
  28. Independent Review of the Primary Curriculum. London: Department for Children, Schools and Families Russ, S. (2004)
  29. Play in Child Development and Psychotherapy. New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Sayeed, Z., Guerin, E. (2000)
  30. Early Years Play: A Happy Medium for Assessment and Intervention. London: David Fulton Singer, D., Golinkoff, R., Hirsh-Pasek, K. (2006)
  31. Play Equals Learning: How Play Motivates and Enhances Children's Cognitive and Social-Emotional Growth. New York: Oxford University Press Trevlas, E., Grammatikopoulos, V., Tsigilis, N., Zachopoulu, E. (2003)
  32. 'Evaluating Playfulness: Construct Validity of the Children's Playfulness Scale.' Early Childhood Education Journal 31 (1), pp. 33 39 UNICEF (1989)
  33. The United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child. London: UNICEF Vygotsky, L.S. (1978)
  34. Mind in Society. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press Whitehead, M. (2010)
  35. Language and Literacy in the Early Years 0 – 7. (4th Ed) London: Sage Publications Ltd Wood, E. (2004)
  36. 'Developing a Pedagogy of Play.' in Anning, A., Cullen, J., Fleer, M. (Eds) Early Childhood Education: Society and Culture. London: Sage pp. 19 30 Wood, E., Attfield, J. (2005)
  37. Play, Learning and the Early Childhood Curriculum. London: Paul Chapman Wyse, D. (Ed) (2004) Childhood Studies: An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Learning Through Play for Child Development. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Homeschooling Essay Example Pdf

Review of Home Schooling

Today there are new options for a child to get education. Gone were the days that all children are taught in a four-walled classroom. As years go by, new
realizations and discoveries crop up with regards to the dissemination of knowledge. Educational techniques, methods, and strategies have been discovered
after experimentations, observations, and studies made by professionals in this field.

With the advanced curriculum, new inventions and innovations to education, there is a need for an alternate way to get these across to children. In
addition, the society today has evolved into producing some hindrances for a normal education; hence, parents are afraid to send their kids to a normal
school. However, there are still advantages to normal schooling, meaning getting instruction for a classroom.

Home schooling ideas came at a time when the need for reforms and alternatives rose to cater to children who cannot attend a regular school for some
reason. Related to distance learning, home schooling has proved to be effective for some and detrimental for knowledge acquisition for some kids. As
methodologies are used for this new kind of learning, special skills for home teachers – parents - are needed to fulfil the role of the absent teacher.
Home schooling is the new trend in education that is known to be beneficial to students.

Home schooling can categorically be the same as distance learning where both processes of acquiring knowledge entails the student to be situated in their
homes, not in a school setting or classroom. In distance learning per se, students may be based in a library, outside the home, or any other places aside
from the school or classroom. Otherwise known as home education or home learning, this system is defined as the education of children in the home by
parents. History tells us that before the law on compulsory school attendance was mandated, the majority of early education happened within the family.
Those who can afford to send their kids to a special school or hire private tutors or governesses experience how other people are teaching it. However, as
years progressed up to the present most of the children are sent to school and get a formal education in either a public school or private educational
institutions.

In developed and developing countries, home schooling is now an option for parents who do not want to send their children to school but would want them to
be educated using a different way away from schools. Parents have their own personal reasons for deciding such. It could be dissatisfaction with school
instructions, avoiding the chances of their kids to be bullied or hurt in school that makes parents lead their kids away from schools.

Another reason for non-attendance in school for some children is the distance of the school from their homes as in the case of some rural and mountainous
areas. Correspondence schools, distance learning institutes, or umbrella schools may provide instruction in home schooling. The education board should
legally approve a set of curriculum.

As aforementioned in the previous page, parent and guardians decide to educate their children home based style for many reasons rather than those already
mentioned.

  • Parents believe children are better educated at home
  • For religious reasons, parents do not want to mix their children with different beliefs
  • Some schools have low standard environment or it is not conducive for learning,
  • Parents don't want their children to be exposed to the influential (bad) characters of other people: classmates and teachers
  • Child has special need or disability thus curtailing or making it difficult for him to move about.

Home Schooling

Aside from those mentioned possible reasons, there are still other reasons that are beyond the control of parents or children like the location of the
school and the availability of transportation.

There are a lot of misconceptions around home schooling. First, parents think that they have to be professionals like having a Ph.D. to be able to teach
their children in a home school setting. There is really no mandated requirement for parents to have a formal education to be able to assist children in
home schooling. However, parents or guardians must show their all-out support and willingness to go through the rigors and challenges of home schooling.

Basically, the social impact of home schooling seems to be used by the government education system to stop kids from leaving school. We all know that
monetary budget will be lost to them. However, to give some benefits to the doubt, traditional classroom education still brings home some desired effects
for the children. On the other hand, not all kids and parents would want home schooling for some reasons aside from academic. Financial status is a
significant element to consider as well.

In the end, it is still the decision of the family, particularly the parents and the school-age child whether home schooling is a better alternative.
Communication is still the best tool since parents must not force home schooling to their kids. Once pushed down their throats, children would rebel and
not perform well.

Taking time to persuade and talk to children would be necessary. Listening to children's woes and ideas would show them how much you value their education.
Still, getting an education is what this is all about. No matter what kind of instruction and the manner of how it is administered, educational instruction
must be present. The important thing is the willingness of the children to learn by means that would benefit them, the family, and the society as a whole.

References

Field, M., & Field, C. M. (2007). Home schooling 101: the essential handbook. Nashville, Tenn: B&H Publishing Group.

Mr. And Mrs. Mark Field are self-professed experts on home schooling after all their four children finished school that way. This book is a compilation of
the basic information that parents should learn about home schooling. Furthermore, this book shares personal experiences of the couple in the home
schooling system that they are recommending to parents.

Guterson, D. (1992). Family matters: why home schooling makes sense. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Guterson discusses the philosophy of home schooling and schooling rather than "how to home school". Despite the fall back and shortcomings of home
schooling, many Americans are now starting to see the benefits of this system. He provides an insightto the realities of home schooling.

Mur, C. (2003). Home schooling. San Diego, Calif: Greenhaven Press.

https://www.lib.msu.edu/harris23/general/atissue.htm

Home schooling has become the newest trend in instruction. Some critics have found this type of instruction can prove detrimental to the normal education
of children. Mur attempts to provide a discussion on the pros and cons of home schooling.

Rivero, L. (2008). The homeschooling option: how to decide when it's right for your family. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Rivero makes interesting insights into the world of homeschooling by identifying options for families. Homeschooling, according to the author, must be a
major decision for families since it is the future of the children that are at stake. Making children help in the decision making for home schooling is
essential.

Williams, M. E. (2000). Education: opposing viewpoints. San Diego, Calif: Greenhaven Press.

https://groups.google.ca/group/axylecodgacyregiuludi/web/opposing-viewpoints-on-homeschooling

Williams facilitates a discussion on the issues and concerns with regards the prevalence of home schooling, not only in the US but globally. The writer
brings the the realities of home schooling as advantages and disadvantages of this education system are presented. Moreover, Williams identifies some ideas
that have made home instruction popular today.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Homeschooling Essay Example Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

E-learning Essay Example Pdf

Introduction

This paper aims to critically explore the use of e-learning in the workplace, identifying both its benefits and its limitations as a viable alternative to more traditional forms of training and education at work. It begins by examining the growth in the use of e-learning systems and the rationale for this, and outlines its various forms. The paper then investigates the relative benefits e-learning has for organisations alongside some of the perceived challenges and criticisms of its use. The paper concludes by summarising the key learning points raised.

The growth of E-Learning

Globally, the e-learning market has been growing rapidly, and e-learning is beginning to emerge as the new model of training and education across a wide range of different sectors and industries (Su et al, 2008). This growth has resulted in part from extensive changes in the working environment, and from a shift from a product-based economy to a knowledge-based one, meaning that there is a more pressing need to train and educate workforces in new technologies and services (Ong, Lai and Wang, 2004). In addition, technological advancement and challenges in technology-oriented working life have paved the way for new forms of electronic learning (Cheng et al, 2014). Consequently, e-learning now accounts for a significant proportion of corporate investment in workforce training (Deeney, 2003).

Understanding the nature of E-Learning Systems

According to Govindasamy (2002), e-learning is a learning experience that is delivered by electronic technologies including for example, the use of the internet, intranets, interactive TV, virtual classrooms and so forth. However, there is no clear agreement on its definition and as a concept, it has been researched in various forms such as an 'instructional medium' (Salas et al, 2002), a 'training method' (Burgess and Russell, 2003), and a 'learning environment' (DeRouin, Fritzsche and Salas, 2005). It has been reported that the lack of consensus over the typology of e-learning in an organisational setting, the vagueness of the terminology used, the vastness in the range of technology and pedagogy involved demonstrates the complexity of e-learning as an entity (Cheng et al, 2014). For some, e-learning is considered only as a mechanism for delivering training and education via electronic medium (Engelbrecht, 2005), whereas for others, it is seen as a distinct form of learning which uses collaboration, internet-based communication and the transfer of knowledge to enhance and develop both the individual themselves and their organisation (Kelly and Bauer, 2004). Whichever way it is viewed, the growth of the e-learning market has resulted in the development and innovation of a vast range of different e-learning technologies including media streaming, providing learners with a much more stimulating and interactive learning experience (Liu, Liao and Pratt, 2009).

The Benefits of E-Learning

Some of the most commonly cited benefits of using e-learning systems as a means of training and educating the workforce include: a reduction in costs due to decreasing the amount of time spent off-site at expensive courses, travel and venue costs, and allowing more effectual use of downtime at work (Jewson, Felsted and Green, 2015); overcoming the limitations of time and physical space to deliver training courses (Gordon, 2003); an increase in the level of compliance to mandatory training for large workforces (Harun, 2002); increased convenience for the participants themselves in terms of choosing when to undertake training and access the course materials (Capper, 2001); and not needing to depend on the time or availability of a trainer (Bouhnik and Marcus, 2006).

It has been claimed that with e-learning, employees are able to take part in self-faced and interactive learning that would otherwise not be possible, and that the learner-centered approach required by e-learning influences employees to alter their learning behaviours within their work environment as well as being an influential training tool (Bandura, 2002). However, it has also been noted that learner control does not always deliver better outcomes; in that programmes and resources may be used superficially whereby learners skim read the e-learning materials without really absorbing the meaning of what is intended to be conveyed (Kraiger and Jerden, 2007). It has been noted that e-learning can also be useful to organisations in terms of standardising their training and in delivering it simultaneously to large geographically dispersed employees (Brown and Charlier, 2013). Required training can also be delivered much more quickly to large numbers of staff than with more traditional approaches (Welsh et al, 2003). Furthermore, in comparison to more traditional classroom based training, studies have found that e-learning can be just as effective, and has advantages in terms of helping to overcome learning barriers associated with introversion and physical distance (McKenzie and Murray, 2010).

However, it has also been recognised that undertaking e-learning may require better personal time management and study skills than those needed in a more directed taught environment (Helyer, 2010), and that e-learning may not be appropriate for all types of learning and content (Welsh et al, 2003). Another, less frequently cited benefit of e-learning is that it has the potential to manage the growth in the amount of information that employees are required to learn. It is claimed that this growth has often led to information overload during training sessions, leading to ineffective training where learners cannot retain all that is being presented to them. By conducting the training via e-learning and only the most interactive part in a traditional classroom setting, the information can be delivered over a longer period of time, and therefore improve information retention (Welsh et al, 2003). Finally, a further potential benefit of e-learning programmes is their capacity to track the activity of learners and their level of achievement in terms of online testing of learner activities (Welsh et al, 2003). Within e-learning, tracking and storage can be made automated. This is particularly beneficial when training is required to demonstrate compliance to mandatory training requirements for example (Welsh et al, 2003).

Limitations of E-Learning Systems

Whilst the benefits of e-learning systems are widely recognised, it has also been criticised as not being as effective or inclusive as more traditional approaches to training and education, and concerns have been expressed that e-learning sometimes fails to live up to its full potential demonstrated through high attrition and sometimes low usage rates (Wang, 2010). Deltsidou et al (2010) found that some individuals who use e-learning systems experience higher levels of anxiety when doing so due to limited IT skills, which subsequently has a detrimental impact on their experience of learning. It has also been argued that for those who are more computer literate, some traditional types of e-learning programmes are found to be restrictive and do not facilitate effective self-directed learning (Pata, 2009). The lack of learner interaction that occurs in the more traditional classroom setting has also been identified as a potential drawback for e-learning programmes (Brown and Charlier, 2013).

In particular, it is felt that senior management could become too preoccupied with the capability to push information onto employees and forget that in order for learning to become embedded it involves more than just information provision and instead also requires practice, feedback, and guidance (Welsh et al, 2003). Other limitations of e-learning systems which have been identified stem from problems associated with the technology itself. In particular, unreliable IT systems can act as a key barrier to e-learning with insufficient access to technical support, freezing computer screens, intermittent internet connections, and excessively long download times for accessing course material (Creedy et al, 2007). Issues around security such as computer hacking and viruses can also be problematic for e-learning programmes and the organisations who use them (Ramim and Levy, 2006). From a cost point of view, implementing e-learning systems often involves high levels of upfront investment to purchase not only the hardware that is required, but also in relation to the ongoing costs involved in maintaining and renewing licenses that are often associated with external e-learning packages (Childs et al, 2005). Specific costs include development costs to design and build the actual courses as well as hardware and software costs to allow users to access the training (Welsh et al, 2003). Furthermore, conducting testing of learning can be challenging with e-learning in relation to assuring the authenticity of those taking the test or exam (Gunasekaran, McNeil and Shaul, 2002).

Acceptance of E-learning in the workplace

The acceptance of e-learning as an appropriate means of training and education by employees is critical to its successful implementation in the workplace, and the reasons why employees might accept or reject such technology must be considered by organisations (Joo Yoo, Han and Huang, 2012). One of the main theories used to explain such acceptance and the relative success or failure of the implementation of new technology such as e-learning, is the technology acceptance model (TAM) (Liu, Liao and Pratt, 2009). The TAM was derived from the theory of reasoned action and proposes two speciïc perspectives on why new technology is accepted or not which relate to the usefulness of the technology and its ease of use (Vijayasarathy, 2004). The greater the perceived usefulness and ease of use of a system, the stronger the willingness and intention is to use it (Davis, 1989). The perceived usefulness relates to the extent to which it is considered that the technology will improve performance, and the perceived ease of use is the degree to which it is believed that using the technology will be unproblematic (Davis et al, 1989). In relation to e-learning, Ong, Lai and Wang (2004) identified that computer self-efficacy significantly impacts on its perceived usefulness and ease of use, with those who have higher levels of computer self-efficacy being much more likely to have positive perceptions of usefulness and ease of use.

Therefore, organisations need to take into consideration the level of computer efficacy amongst its workforce before implementing e-learning. Associated with the TAM is the theory of flow. This theory is concerned with concentration and asserts that when individuals are in flow, they become engrossed in their activity, and according to Liu, Liao and Pratt (2009), this theory can help to explain the intended and actual use of e-learning programmes by individuals. Media rich and interactive e-learning systems are more likely to engage individuals and result in 'flow' which then impacts on their learning outcomes and experience. Critics of e-learning state that a high level of self-motivation is needed in order to effectively complete programmes, and Roca and Gagne (2008) propose that self-determination theory is useful for conceptualizing the influence of organisational factors in an individual's motivation to use e-learning. From their study, they found that individuals were more likely to continue using e-learning when they feel autonomous, competent and enjoy using it. They conclude that consistent with self-directed theory, when individuals participate in learning because it is interesting and enjoyable, they are more likely to engage with it and benefit from it.

Conclusion

From the critical review above, it is evident that the use of e-learning, as a model of training and education in the workplace, is growing at a rapid pace in response to the demands from ever changing working environments, shifts towards knowledge based economies, and advancements in technology. Numerous benefits of e-learning have been identified focusing mainly around cost savings, learner convenience, flexibility, consistency and particularly in its ability to provide training and education to large, dispersed workforces simultaneously. However, a number of challenges for organisations have also been identified around, gaining the acceptance of the workforce in implementing such e-learning technologies, underpinned by different theories such as TAM, flow and self-determination theory. Other limitations of e-learning have also been cited in relation to high start-up costs and problems associated with equipment and internet problems. Further concerns that have been identified in the current literature are around the lack of interaction between learners with e-learning which exists with the more traditional classroom learning environment. However, despite the identified limitations, it would appear that e-learning in the workplace is going to continue to grow alongside continuous advancements in associated technology, and sophistication of e-learning programme design. In addition, computer usage and the use of digital technologies is expanding and becoming the norm and so acceptance of e-learning is becoming much more prevalent. It is therefore likely to continue to form a significant proportion of corporate investment in workforce training and development in the future.

References

  1. Bandura, A. (2002) "Social cognitive theory in cultural context", Applied Psychology, Vol. 51 (2), pp. 269. Bouhnik, D. and Marcus, T. (2006). "Interaction in distance-learning courses". Journal of the American Society Information Science and Technology, Vol. 57 (3), pp. 299–305. Brown, K.G. and Charlier, S.D. (2013) "An integrative model of e-learning use: Leveraging theory to understand and increase usage", Human Resource Management Review, Vol. 23 (1), pp. 37-49. Burgess, J. R. D. and Russell, J. E. A. (2003). "The effectiveness of distance learning initiatives in organizations". Journal of Vocational Behavior, Vol. 63, pp. 289–303. Capper, J. (2001). "E-learning growth and promise for the developing world". TechKnowLogia, pp. 7-10. Cheng, B., Wang. M., MA¸rch, A.I., Chen, N.C., Kinshuk, J. and Spector, M. (2014) "Research on e-learning in the workplace 2000–2012: A bibliometric analysis of the literature", Educational Research Review, Vol. 11, pp. 56–72. Childs, S., Blenkinsopp, E., Hall, A. and Walton, G. (2005) "Effective e-learning for health professionals and students—barriers and their solutions.
  2. A systematic review of the literature: findings from the HeXL project", Health Information and Libraries Journal, Vol. 22, pp.20–32. Creedy, D.K., Mitchell, M., Seaton-Sykes, P., Cooke, M., Patterson, E., Purcell, C., -Weeks, P. (2007). "Evaluating a web-enhanced bachelor of nursing curriculum: perspectives of third-year students". Journal of Nursing Education, Vol. 46 (10), pp. 460–467. Davis, F.D. (1989) "Perceived usefulness, perceived ease of use, and user acceptance of information technology", MIS Quarterly, Vol. 13 (3), pp. 318–339. Davis, F.D., Bagozzi, R.P., Warshaw, P.R. (1989) "User acceptance of computer technology: a comparison of two theoretical models", Management Science, Vol. 35 (8), pp. 982–1003. Deeney, E. (2003) "Calculating the real value of e-learning". Industrial & Commercial Training, Vol. 35 (2/3), pp. 70–72. Deltsidou, A., Voltyraki, E.G., Mastrogiannis, D., Noula, M., 2010. "Undergraduate nursing students' computer skills assessment: a study in Greece". Health Science Journal, Vol. 4 (3), p. 182. DeRouin, R. E., Fritzsche, B. A. and Salas, E. (2005a).
  3. "Learner control and workplace e-learning: Design, person, and organizational issues". In J. Martocchio (Ed.). Research in personnel and human resources management (Vol. 24, pp. 181–214). New York: Elsevier. Engelbrecht, E. (2005) "Adapting to changing expectations: Postgraduate students' experience of an e-learning tax program". Computers and Education, Vol. 45 (2), pp. 217–229. Gordon, J. (2003) "E-learning Tagged as Best Corporate IT Investment", E-learning, Vol. 4 (1), pp. 8. Govindasamy, T. (2002) "Successful implementation of e-learning pedagogical considerations, Internet and Higher Education, Vol. 4 (3), pp. 287–299. Gunasekaran, A., McNeil, R. D. and Shaul, D. (2002) "E-learning: Research and applications". Industrial and Commercial Training, Vol. 34 (2), pp. 44–54. Harun, M.H. (2002) "Integrating e-learning into the workplace", Internet and Higher Education, Vol. 4 (3/4), pp. 301–310. Helyer, R. (2010) The Work-Based Learning Students Handbook. Basingstoke: MacMillan. Jewson, N., Felstead, A. and Green, F. (2015) "Training in the public sector in a period of austerity: the case of the UK", Journal of Education and Work, Vol. 28 (3), pp. 228-249. Joo Yoo, S., Han, S. and Huang, W. (2012) "The roles of intrinsic motivators and extrinsic motivators in promoting e-learning in the workplace: A case from South Korea",
  4. Computers in Human Behavior, Vol. 28, pp. 942–950. Kelly, T. and Bauer, D. (2004). "Managing Intellectual capital via e-learning at Cisco". In C. Holsapple (Ed.), Handbook on knowledge management 2: Knowledge directions (pp. 511–532). Berlin, Germany: Springer. Kraiger, K. and Jerden, E. (2007). A new look at learner control: Meta-analytic results and directions for future research. In S. M. Fiore, & E. Salas (Eds.), Where is the Learning in Distance Learning? Towards a science of distributed learning and training (pp. 65–90). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association. Liu, S.H., Liao, H.L. and Pratt, J.A. (2009) "Impact of media richness and flow on e-learning technology acceptance", Computers and Education, Vol. 52, pp. 599–607. McKenzie, K. and Murray, A. (2010) "
  5. E-learning benefits nurse education and helps shape students' professional identity", Nursing Times, Vol. 106 (5), pp.17-19. Ong, C.S., Lai, J.Y. and Wang, Y.S. (2004) "Factors affecting engineers' acceptance of asynchronous e-learning systems in high-tech companies", Information & Management, Vol. 41, pp. 795–804. Pata, K. (2009) "Modeling spaces for self-directed learning at university courses". Educational Technology & Society, Vol. 12 (3), pp. 23–43. Ramim, M. and Levy, Y. (2006). "Securing e-learning systems: A case of insider cyber-attacks and novice IT management in a small university". Journal of Cases on Information Technology, Vol. 8 (4), pp. 24–34. Roca, J.C. and Gagne, M. (2008) "Understanding e-learning continuance intention in the workplace: A self-determination theory perspective", Computers in Human Behavior, Vol. 24, pp. 1585–1604. Salas, E., Kosarzycki, M. P., Burke, C. S., Fiore, S. M. and Stone, D. L. (2002). "
  6. Emerging themes in distance learning research and practice: Some food for thought", International Journal of Management Reviews, Vol. 4, pp. 135–153. Sun, P.C., Tsai, R.J., Finger, G., Chen, Y.Y. and Yeh, D. (2008) "What drives a successful e- Learning? An empirical investigation of the critical factors influencing learner satisfaction", Computers & Education, Vol. 50 (4), pp. 1183–1202. Vijayasarathy, L.R. (2004) "Predicting consumer intentions to use on-line shopping: the case for an augmented technology acceptance model", Information & Management, Vol. 41, pp. 747–762. Wang, G. G. (2010) "Theorizing e-learning participation: A study of the HRD online communities in the USA". Journal of European Industrial Training, Vol. 34, pp. 344–364. Welsh, E.T., Wanberg, C.R., Brown, K.G. and Simmering, M.J. (2003) "E-learning: emerging uses, empirical results and future directions", International Journal of Training and Development, Vol. 7 (4), pp. 245-258.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

E-learning Essay Example Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Self Evaluation Essay

Self Evaluation Upon Learning

This paper describes a process of self-evaluation, reflection upon learning, and planning for future developments. As well as considering the learning points which have been successfully internalized over the course of the semester, it will incorporate reflection on strengths and weaknesses, and begin to outline future communication with putative employers. In addition to presenting some analysis of the formal and academic aspects of the experience, it will discuss the interpersonal aspects of learning, and the development of those capacities which may have professional and vocational applications. As Stenhouse points out, ‘A curriculum is an attempt to communicate the essential principles and features of an educational proposal in such a form that it is open to critical scrutiny and capable of effective translation into practice.' (1), However, negotiating the formal structures and requirements of the curriculum is only one aspect of the learning process. A perceptible process of transformation has begun in education, away from a lecture based didactic approach and towards adaptable, flexible modes of learning and teaching. Accordingly, this record of reflective learning will discuss the use of oral, listening and communication skills, considering self-management in group situations. In conclusion, it will present a flexible plan for the future, outlining the skills which need to be developed and providing some indicative targets and points for action. This piece presents my own reflections, and where appropriate, makes reference to appropriate research and analysis by published authorities. From a purely personal perspective, undertaking the module involved a reconsideration of my own identity and purpose, and the sorting through of the multiple dimensions and preoccupations of my life. As Hall points out, ‘…no one has one identity; and indeed those identities may be in tension (one example would be the ways in which “mother” and “worker” are often understood as existing in tension.' (2) Consequently, it was important to reconfigure ones self-identity and direction in the light of new knowledge and perspectives. In this respect, it is important to be aware that personality and self-image are often key determinants in setting personal objectives, defining outcomes, and constructing the parameters within which any one of us can grow and interact with their environment. As Elliot puts it, ‘We often think of the self as primarily a private domain, an inner realm of personal thoughts, values, strivings, emotions and desires. Yet this view, which seems largely self-evident, is in contrast to the way in which sociologists study the framing of personal identity and the self.' (3) Therefore, locating oneself within a social continuum, in some ways a necessary social skill and a pre-requisite of social/group orientation, can be both limiting and damaging. It is also important to consider cultural identity and the way national, regional, chronological and even familial micro cultures are profoundly constructive of our own life politics. It has become a truism in life-politics that emotional awareness – or emotional intelligence – is a fundamental determinant of how individuals will approach, engage with, and function with regard to social structures, whether the latter are in the public or private sphere. As Goleman explains, ‘self-awareness – recognizing a feeling as it happens – is the keystone of emotional intelligence….the ability to monitor feelings from moment to moment is crucial to psychological insight and self-understanding.' (4) Some individuals may have this capacity through innate cognitive ability, whilst others must attempt to construct it using deliberately reflective techniques. However, the experience of the module has illustrated to me that it is not an option: interpersonal effectiveness basically demands that individuals exercise this facility, or develop it, as appropriate. As Bolton explains, ‘Reflective practice and reflexivity are not subjects but a pedagogical approach which should pervade the curriculum.' (5) This is not say that formally defined subject knowledge, academic skills, or the didactic position, itself, are in any way less relevant or marginal in the curriculum process. It does indicate however that the ability to manage the dynamics of learning, and to demonstrate it through interpersonal growth, has become more prominent. It is fair to argue then, as Fraser and Bosanquet have done, that ‘…Students are the receptors of the curriculum and their impact upon it varies…' (6) I found that, in the interactive learning environment, the effectiveness of the curriculum was determined and defined to a significant degree by us as learners, and in particular by our willingness to contribute new knowledge as perceptions. In this respect, the module was As Fraser and Bosanquet point out, ‘The changing nature of knowledge relevant to the discipline, and research in the discipline area, also influence the structure and learning goals of the programme…'. (7). I consider that one of the key aspects of the module was its capacity to develop interpersonal working and the ability to work within a group dynamic. The resolution of issues, coordination of effort, and maximisation of individual skills through delegation are all highly transferable skills, which added to the developmental strengths of the formal curriculum. As Davis observes, ‘Whilst there is demand for the traditional ability to analyse, think critically an work independently…', there is also a growing demand for ‘…transferable skills….communication, team working,…and problem solving.' This requires ‘careful curriculum planning, support mechanisms, teaching methodologies and assessment strategies…' (8). As discussed above, there are a range of factors which form the individual's attitudes and effectiveness within this dynamic, in terms of what they deem acceptable or effective approaches. Many of these are culturally formed, and may be interpreted within frameworks such Hofstede's Cultural Dimensions Index. Within this, Hofestede projects, each culture has tolerances and behavioural norms which dictate group behaviour, as well as strategic thinking within organisations. He defines these criteria as uncertainty avoidance, power distance, long/short term orientation, gender, i.e. masculinity and femininity, and individualism/collectivism. (9). Perhaps more revealing than this scheme of wide cultural sub-groups, however, is the related idea that these are just one component in tripartite scheme which includes universal human traits, ‘learned' behaviour and values, and individual personality traits. (10) I consider that the recognition of individual strengths and weaknesses is a key factor, not only in the recognition of individual contributions, but in effective team building. I have definitely learned that assembling a team is a skill in itself. Simply pushing together a random group of individuals is not team-building. Correspondingly, one learning point which I can take from team working on the module, is that different individuals place value upon different aspects of interpersonal dealings, and that this has to recognised, despite personal preferences. For example, some co-learners on the module – and through logical extension, some colleagues in a professional situation – placed a high value on directness within relationships, and preferred immediate action to a deferred approach. Conversely, some personalities felt far more secure with an incremental approach to issues, preferring to delay action until the maximum possible information and analysis was assembled. Some individuals placed a high premium on relationship building through personal interaction, and took this as the inception of a trust network, before moving on to the specifics of a problem or issue. Meanwhile, some individuals were comfortable with the exact reverse of this; they wanted to stay focused on the dimensions of the issue, and preferred to leave the interpersonal dimensions of team building to take their natural course. The main learning point which emerged from this for me, was that such characteristics needed to be recognised, accepted, and factored into team building, as well as its functioning dynamic. No one individual conforms absolutely to a specific personality or behavioural type: however, their dominant personality traits are likely to be those which emerge at key decision making moments. To get the best out of people and teams, the nature of their contribution needs to be taken into account. As Sonnetag observes, ‘There is relatively consistent empirical evidence for a positive relationship between specific aspects of individual well-being and....performance.' (11) The ability to ensure this well-being and secure the related performance – in myself as well as in other learners – and eventually co-workers – is one of the key developmental points that I will take from the module as a whole. . As Murphy and Riggio indicate, ‘…complexity provides the resources (cognitive, social, behavioural) for generating numerous possible responses to a given situation. Individuals as well as organizations are healthy and thrive when they are capable of many responses to a given situation, and become brittle and vulnerable to changing conditions when they are uniform and specialized.' (12). I prefer to think of this as understanding the personal, interpersonal, and strategic implications of the psychological contract. As Williams indicates regarding this phenomenon, ‘this interpersonal aspect to fairness reminds us that there is a social basis to the exchange relationship between employer and employee and we might expect this to be part of the psychological contract.' (13) One of the key objectives that I will take away from the module is the ability to understand – through use of a reflective cycle - the development of psychological contracts between individuals, within groups, across stakeholders, and between employees and management. I recognise that this, in itself, is an objective which relies heavily on the capacity to use one's own emotional intelligence, and that this in itself is an on-going task. As Goleman has observed, , ‘…unlike the familiar tests for IQ, there is, as yet, no single paper and pencil test that yields an emotional intelligence score, and there may never be one. ‘ (14) In fact it could be argued that those with emotional intelligence as a dominant aspect of their skills set, tend to eschew formal learning situations altogether, relying on their reading of situations and interpersonal skills rather than credentialism to get where they want to be. The important point for me here is to recognize that these skills are increasingly important in the socialized workforce, and central to achievement of common goals. As Guest and Conway have indicated, ‘…built on the three pillars of fairness, trust and delivery of the deal between organizations and employees, a positive psychological contract is the best guarantee of good performance outcomes.' (15) Here are some key points for my development, around which specific targets may be developed.

  • Have I planned and managed my own workload effectively: have I consistently met deadlines, without suspending working routines, or the absorption of resources of time from other projects or priorities?
  • In team working situations, was I effective in determining the roles allocated to myself and others, using prior knowledge about myself and them?
  • Did I retain effective control over my role, and did my input have a discernible and measurable impact on the project as a whole?
  • How will I assess whether or not I have consistently managed work relationships in an effective way?
  • Assuming I can assemble such an assessment, would my co-learners' or colleagues evaluations be likely to support this?
  • Is my role – or the role of others – clear to everyone concerned?

In my estimation, and with regard to the insights I have obtained about interpersonal effectiveness from the module, achievement of these objectives would go a considerable way towards making me an effective learner. They are also principles which could be deemed constructive of a learning organization as a whole, something which, in my view, we should all regard as the worthwhile outcome of our individual contributions. As Hyam and Mason point out, ‘The learning organization, argue its advocates, is one in which managers perceive their position in the organization, and their relationship with subordinates, in a radically new way, utilizing new metaphors and ways of understanding.' (16). One way to measure individual progress towards this outcome would be through the use of a reflective scheme such as Gibbs' Reflective Cycle.: Within this, the learner or practitioner can use description to visualize developments or events, subsequently evaluating their own emotional response in the ‘feelings' stage of the process. From there you progress on to the evaluation and analysis stages, seeking out any wider implications or perceptible patterns from the situation, before proceeding onto the conclusion and action plan. I consider this skill-set to be of huge importance, because wherever you go in the contemporary employment scene, you will encounter an appraisal and system, and some form of target setting regime. Being aware of one's own real situation in relation to the requirements of a professional situation, is therefore just as important as finding out about the perceptions of others. In my opinion, this is the difference between merely transactional or genuinely transformational management. As Fincham and Rhodes express it, the transactional model is ‘…simply a mutual exchange for economic or political reasons between leader or follower. In transformational leadership a deeper, more powerful process is present. Here one or more persons engage with others in such a way that leaders and followers raise each other up to higher levels of motivation and morality.' (17). It can be argued therefore that worthwhile transactional management begins in the personal sphere.

Footnotes

1.) Stenhouse, L (1975, .An Introduction to Curriculum Research and Development .London: Heinemann, p.4. 2 ) Hall, S., ‘Who Needs Identity?' in Hall, S., and du Gay, P., (1996), (eds), Questions of Cultural Identity, Sage, London. p.5. 3.) Elliot, A., (2001), Concepts of the Self, Polity Press, Cambridge p.24. 4.) Goleman, (1996), Emotional Intelligence: Why It Can Matter More Than IQ, Bloomsbury, London. p.43. 5.) Bolton, G., (2005), Reflective Practice: Writing and Professional Development, 2nd Edition, Sage, London, p.3. 6.) Fraser, S., and Bosanquet, A., (2006), ‘The curriculum? That is just a unit outline, isn't it?', Studies in Higher Education, 31, pp.269-284, p.274 7.) ibid. 8.) Davis, M., (2003), ‘Barriers to reflective practice: the changing nature of higher education' in Active learning in higher education 4 (3) pp. 243-255, p.247. 9.) Hofstede, G., (2003), Cultures and Organizations: Intercultural Cooperation and its Importance for Survival, Profile Business, London. p.9 10.) ibid., p.6. 11.) Sonnetag, S., (ed), (2002) Psychological Management of Individual Performance, John Wiley and Sons, Chichester, p.4110. 12.) Murphy, S.E., Riggio, R.E., (2003), The Future of Leadership Development, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Mahwah NJ, p.13. 13.) Williams, R.S., (1998) Performance Management: Perspectives on Employee Performance, International Thomson Business Press, St.Ives, p.183. 14.) Goleman, (1996), Emotional Intelligence: Why It Can Matter More Than IQ, Bloomsbury, London p.44. 15.) Guest, D.E., and Conway, N., (2004), Employee Well-being and the Psychological Contract: A Report for the CIPD, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development, London, p.vii. 16.) Hyam, J., and Mason, B., (1995), Managing Employee Involvement and Participation, Sage, London, p.145. 17.) Fincham, R., & Rhodes, P., (2005), Principles of Organizational Behaviour, Oxford University Press, Oxford p.345.

Bibliography

Armstrong, A., and Baron, A.,(2005), Managing Performance: Performance Management in Action, CIPD, London. Armstrong, A., (1994), Performance Management, Kogan Page, London. Arthur, M.B., (1996), The Boundaryless Career: A New Employment Principle for a New Organizational Era' Oxford University Press. Baker, J., (1988), Causes of Failure in Performance Appraisal and Supervision: A Guide to Analysis and Evaluation for Human Resources Professionals, Quorum Books, New York. Barrow, G., and Newton, T., (2004), Walking the Talk: How Transactional Analysis is Improving Behaviour and Raising Self-Esteem, David Fulton, London. Bolton, G., (2005), Reflective Practice: Writing and Professional Development, 2nd Edition, Sage, London. Davis, M., (2003), ‘Barriers to reflective practice: the changing nature of higher education' in Active learning in higher education 4 (3) pp. 243-255 Fincham, R., & Rhodes, P., (2005), Principles of Organizational Behaviour, Oxford University Press, Oxford. Forster, M., (2005) Maximum Performance: A Practical Guide to Leading and Managing People at Work, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham. Fraser, S., and Bosanquet, A., (2006), ‘The curriculum? That is just a unit outline, isn't it?', Studies in Higher Education, 31, pp.269-284. Goleman, D., (1996), Emotional Intelligence: Why It Can Matter More Than IQ, Bloomsbury, London. Guest, D.E., and Conway, N., (2004), Employee Well-being and the Psychological Contract: A Report for the CIPD, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development, London. Hall, S., ‘Who Needs Identity?' in Hall, S., and du Gay, P., (1996), (eds), Questions of Cultural Identity, Sage, London. Hiser, S., ‘e-Recruitment: Tools help staff see the effects of effort.' Financial Times

,

Published: November 7 2007. INTERNET, available at https://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/c8757344-8c95-11dc-b887-0000779fd2ac.html, [viewed 12.4.08] n.p. Gerte Hofstede Cultural Dimensions Website, INTERNET, available at https://www.geert-hofstede.com/hofstede_dimensions.php?culture1=95&culture2=18#compare [viewed 20.8.08] n.p. Hofstede, G., (2003), Cultures and Organizations: Intercultural Cooperation and its Importance for Survival, Profile Business, London. Holland, J.L., (1997), Making Vocational Choices: A Theory of Vocational Personalities and Work Environments, London. Hyam, J., and Mason, B., (1995), Managing Employee Involvement and Participation, Sage, London. Maslow, A.H., (1970) Motivation and Personality, 3rd Edition, Harper Collins, New York. Murphy, S.E., Riggio, R.E., (2003), The Future of Leadership Development, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Mahwah NJ. Sonnetag, S., (ed), (2002) Psychological Management of Individual Performance, John Wiley and Sons, Chichester. Stenhouse, L (1975, .An Introduction to Curriculum Research and Development .London: Heinemann. Walters, M., (1995), The Performance Management Handbook, Institute of Personnel and Development, London. Warmington, A., Lupton, C., and Gribbin, C., (1977), Organisational Behaviour and Performance: an Open Systems Approach to Change, MacMillan, London. Williams, R.S., (1998) Performance Management: Perspectives on Employee Performance, International Thomson Business Press, St.Ives.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Self Evaluation Essay. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Behavioral Psychology

Briefly outline Behaviourism. How does this theory aid in an understanding of disruptive behaviour, and what are the limitations of this approach?

Behaviourism

Behaviourism was the primary psychological paradigm of the early twentieth century and is characterised by the work of Watson (1913) and Skinner (1976). It is an approach to learning that focuses on observable and quantifiable behaviour and discounts the need to refer to mental processes (Pritchard, 2009). Knowledge is seen as a repertoire of behaviours that are largely passive, mechanical responses to environmental stimuli (Wray, 2010). In order to describe this knowledge, no reference to internal, mental processes are needed, and instead, someone is said to understand something if they possess the appropriate repertoire of behaviours. Behaviourists believe that the aim of education is to provide learners with the appropriate repertoire of responses to specific stimuli. Information, in the form of the appropriate behaviour for a certain stimulus, is transmitted from the teacher to the learner and learning is described as "the acquisition of a new behaviour or the modification of behaviour as a result of teaching, training or tutoring" (Woollard, 2010, p. 1). Behavioural responses are reinforced through the use of an effective reinforcement schedule which breaks down material into a sequence of small tasks, consistently repeats the material, and provides positive reinforcement to correct responses (Skinner, 1976).A  As such, teaching methods includes techniques such as learning by rote, 'skill and drill', and question and answer tasks that gradually increase in difficulty, as these techniques are able to break down material into smaller pieces and allow for the consistent repetition needed for learning to take place (Wray, 2010). It is also believed that teaching should be carefully planned and systematic, regularly testing learners' behaviours in order to monitor their progress and provide feedback on their learning (Cox, 2004). Behaviourism as a method of teaching and learning content has received considerable criticism in recent years and has generally fallen out of favour, not least because of its disregard of what goes on within a learner's head and its rejection of the importance of the mental processes the learner engages in (Bartlett and Burton, 2012). However, in the field of behaviour management, behaviourism is still an important influence and a number of behaviour management approaches and techniques draw from this field of psychology.

Behaviourist Behaviour Management

From a behaviourist perspective, all behaviour is considered to be a repertoire of responses to a particular stimulus. Appropriate responses can be taught and learnt through the use of an effective reinforcement schedule. Therefore, from this perspective, disruptive behaviour is considered to be an undesirable response to a set of stimuli, and children can be taught more desirable responses through the use of reinforcement. Using this basic theory, behaviourism has had considerable influence on classroom management techniques and the encouragement of appropriate behaviours in the classroom. Using a behaviourist perspective, Merrett and Wheldall (2012, p. 19) recommend using a 'positive teaching' approach to establish the context for appropriate classroom behaviour, characterised by the following five basic principles:
  1. It is concerned with the observable, i.e. behaviour;
  2. It is assumed that behaviour is learned;
  3. Learning involves change in behaviour;
  4. Changes in behaviour depend mainly upon consequences;
  5. Behaviours are also governed by the contexts in which they appear.
This approach emphasises how appropriate behaviour can be taught and learned through the use of behaviourist principles. The teacher firstly identifies the behaviours that they consider to be desirable and those that are considered to be disruptive and undesirable and then communicates these rules to the learners. The teacher then rewards the learners who display the desirable behaviour, thus changing behaviour through showing the learners the positive consequences of displaying appropriate behaviour (Pritchard, 2009). Behaviour management approaches such as 'assertive discipline' follow a similar pattern. In this case, a series of rules are established, there are rewards for those who follow the rules and consequences for those who do not, and these rewards and consequences are consistently applied (Canter and Canter, 1992). Current government guidelines for the management of behaviour in UK schools also adopt such an approach (DfE, 2011). Behaviourist principles can also be used to help understand disruptive behaviour once it occurs. From a behaviourist perspective, the understanding of disruptive behaviour does not require any consideration of the learner's internal mental states or consciousness as it is believed that states such as belief, motivation, and satisfaction can be understood through an examination of the manifested behaviour (Woollard, 2010). Instead, an analysis of disruptive behaviour requires only an examination of the behaviour itself and the context in which the behaviour occurs with no reference to the learner's mental processes. Behaviour is examined in terms of what comes either before or after the manifested behaviour using a model known as the ABC model, where:
  1. Antecedent: what happens in the context prior to the observable behaviour;
  2. Behaviour: describes what actually happens in observable terms;
  3. Consequences: what happens immediately afterwards
Roffey, 2006, p. 8 It is believed that behaviour can be changed by either changing the antecedence to the behaviour or the consequences of the behaviour. Hastings and Wheldall (1996) numerate a number of advantages of this model of understanding disruptive behaviour. They suggest that it focuses the teacher's attention on what the child actually does in the B aspect; the behaviour has to be systemically observed and recorded rather than simply labelling the behaviour under the general umbrella term of 'disruptive'. Furthermore, the teacher's attention is directed towards events within the classroom that s/he has influence over and thus, can change in order to effect change in the child's behaviour. Thirdly, it is suggested that the ABC approach emphasises that the child's behaviour takes place within a particular context and that their behaviour is both influenced by the environment and that their behaviour influences what happens next in the classroom. Finally, this approach provides links between the identification of undesirable behaviour, an explanation for why it occurs, and possible strategies for changing the behaviour. Any attempt to change behaviour using this model should begin with the questions 'What triggered the behaviour?', in other words, the antecedence, and 'How is this behaviour being reinforced?', in other words, an examination of the consequences (Welsh Assembly, 2010). Antecedents to disruptive behaviour include both issues that the teachers can affect such as task difficulty, the learner's engagement with the topic, the classroom seating arrangement, and their relationship with the teacher, as well as issues that the teacher has little control over, for instance the effect of the learner's home environment on their learning. The ABC model suggests that teachers can use a number of preventative strategies to avoid disruptive behaviour by eliminating the antecedents to the unwanted behaviour, for example, the teacher can enforce rules through positive statements, they can give praise that is behaviour specific or they can change teaching to engage the interest of the learners (Gulliford and Miller, 2015). However, despite the teacher's best efforts, it is highly likely that some children may still display disruptive behaviour on occasions. In this case, according to behaviourism, it is important to address the consequences of the behaviour as it may be the case that the undesirable behaviour is being reinforced by the reaction the learner provokes. For example, the child may behave badly in order to gain the teacher's attention as, for some children, any attention, even negative, is better than no attention. Every time the teacher reacts, they are reinforcing the child's disruptive behaviour. Alternatively, the child may be behaving badly in order to secure a reaction from their peers, and again, if this reaction is gained, the behaviour is being reinforced (Wray, 2010). Therefore, behaviourism advocates teaching learners new repertoires of behaviour and then reinforcing this good behaviour. Equally important, the undesirable behaviour should not be reinforced. Thus, reinforcement is the key aspect of this stage; however, it should be noted that, according to behaviourism, punishments and sanctions are not a part of the reinforcement schedule (Gulliford and Miller, 2015). Instead, positive reinforcement should be used as it is argued that pleasant experiences are more likely to help learners make the desired connections between specific stimuli and the appropriate response to that stimuli (Wray, 2010). Positive reinforcement can be given in three instances (LaVigna, 2000): a reward can be given when a learner chooses a preferred behaviour, known as differential reinforcement of an alternative response; a reward can be given when the learner chooses not to commit the undesirable behaviour, known as a differential reinforcement of the omission of a response; finally, a reward can be given when the learner displays a lower frequency of unwanted behaviour, known as a differential reinforcement of lower rates of responding. Disruptive and undesirable behaviour should be ignored as much as possible so as not to reinforce the behaviour (Wray, 2010).

Limitations of Behaviourism

While behaviourism continues to exert an influence over behaviour management techniques in today's schools, it has also been criticised for its limitations. Some of these criticisms derive from the incorrect application of the approach. Martella et al. (2012), for example, suggest that behaviourist approaches to dealing with disruptive behaviour such as assertive discipline are often misused in practice as teachers often neglect the praise components and move straight to the punishments. As such, bad behaviour is being reinforced through the negative attention the learners receive and good behaviour is not being reinforced. Other criticisms focus on the limitations of the approach itself. One major criticism of behaviourism is that it does not recognise the uniqueness of the individual (Vialle et al., 2005). In the educational context, Weare (2004) suggests that behaviourist approaches to behaviour management do not work equally with all learners, and they particularly do not work for those who may find it difficult to fit in with the behavioural demands of the learning setting because of reasons such as cultural differences, learning difficulties, and their emotional state. Therefore, it is argued that behaviour management should take a more holistic approach and should consider the child's unique personal situation, their developmental level, cultural and social background and personality and characteristics instead of focusing on rigid norms of 'acceptable' and 'unacceptable' behaviour (Kay, 2006). Similarly, the behaviourist approach is also criticised for taking a simplistic approach to behaviour, largely derived from experiments on animals. Learners are considered to be passive recipients who react to various stimuli provided by the trainer, and who have little free will of their own (Wragg, 2001). This view of humans does not take into account the complex nature of human learning, and in focusing on only the observable behaviour, the learner's cognition and thinking processes are ignored. Furthermore, it is suggested that behaviour management techniques that focus only on behaviour and do not consider the mental processes of the individual are unable to change the learner's cognition (Garner, 2009). This is because there is a focus on supressing bad behaviour rather than a focus on teaching learners new responses and changing long-term behaviour problems (Kearney, 2007).A  As such, it is suggested that behaviourist approaches have little long-term effect and do not teach learners the skills to respond to situations in more appropriate ways. Finally, behaviourist approaches to behaviour management have been criticised for their focus on rewards and it has been suggested that such a focus can reduce a learner's intrinsic motivation to complete tasks (Vialle et al., 2005). In other words, the learner learns not to value learning and good behaviour for its own sake, but for the extrinsic rewards they receive for behaving well and completing the tasks the teacher gives them. As such, the learner does not become a self-motivated learner, but is reliant on the approval and direction of the teacher.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the behaviourist approach suggests a basic ABC model for understanding disruptive behaviour through an examination of the antecedents and the consequences of the behaviour within the context in which it occurs. This approach also provides a number of suggestions for strategies for avoiding disruptive behaviour and dealing with it once it occurs. It would seem that behaviourism is a commonly used behaviour management approach; humans tend to use reinforcement in their general behaviour and research has shown that the vast majority of teachers use behaviourist principles in their behaviour management strategies (Wragg, 2001). However, given the limitations of this approach, it would perhaps be useful for teachers to be aware of different approaches to behaviour management so that the needs of each individual student can be met.

References

Bartlett, S., & Burton, D. (2012). Introduction to Education Studies, 3rd Edition. London: Sage. Canter, L., & Canter, M. (1992).AssertiveDiscipline. Santa Monica: LeeCanterAssociates. Cox, M. (2004). Children's learning. In Nicholls, G. (Ed.). An Introduction to Teaching, 2nd Edition, pp. 38-56. London: Routledge. DfE (Department for Education). (2011). Getting the simple things right: Charlie Taylor's behaviour checklists. Retrieved from https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/283997/charlie_taylor_checklist.pdf. (Accessed October 1, 2015). Garner, P. (2009). Special Educational Needs: The Key Concepts. London: Routledge. Gulliford, A., & Miller, A. (2015). Managing classroom behaviour: Perspectives from psychology. In Cline, T., Gulliford, A, & Birch, S. (Eds.). Educational Psychology, 2nd Edition, pp. 223-257. London: Routledge. Hastings, N., & Wheldall, K. (1996). Effective classroom behaviour management. In Croll, P., & Hastings, N. (Eds.). Effective Primary Teaching: Research Based Strategies, pp. 72-86. London: David Fulton. Kay, J. (2006). Managing Behaviour in the Early Years. London: Continuum. Kearney, A. (2007). Understanding Applied Behaviour Analysis: An introduction to ABA for parents, teachers, and other professionals. London: Jessica Kingsley. LaVigna, G. (2000). Alternatives to Punishment. New York: Irvington. Martella, R.C., Nelson, J.R., Marchand-Martella, N.E., & O'Reilly, M. (2012).Comprehensive Behavior Management: Individualized, classroom, and schoolwide approaches, 2nd Edition. London: Sage. Merrett, F., & Wheldall, K. (2012). British teachers and the behavioural approach to teaching. In Wheldall. K. (Ed.). The Behaviourist in the Classroom, pp. 18-49. London: Routledge. Pritchard, A. (2009). Ways of Learning: Learning theories and learning styles in the classroom, 2nd edition. London: David Fulton. Roffey, S. (2006). Helping with Behaviour. London: Routledge. Skinner, B.F. (1976) About Behaviourism, New York: Vintage Books. Vialle, W., Lysaght, P., & Verenikina, I. (2005).Psychology for Educators. London: Cengage Learning. Watson, J.B. (1913). Psychology as the behaviorist views it. Psychological Review, 20, 158-178. Weare, K. (2004). Developing the Emotionally Literate School. London: Paul Chapman. Welsh Assembly. (2010). Practical Approaches to Behaviour Management in the Classroom. Cardiff: Welsh Assembly Government. Woollard, J. (2010).Psychology for the Classroom: Behaviourism. London: Routledge. Wragg, E.C. (2001). Class Management in the Secondary School. London: Routledge. Wray, D. (2010). Looking at learning. In Arthur, J., & Cremin, T. (Eds.). Learning to Teach in the Primary School, 2nd Edition, pp. 41-52. London: Routledge.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Behavioral Psychology. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Gaining Essay Online for Free

Part 1: Analyse and identify all of the influencing factors on gaining a first class degree. During this analysis clearly display the controllable/uncontrollable factors surrounding this situation. (40marks)

The factors that influence the achievement of a 1st class degree can be split into two categories; those that can be controlled by the individual in question and those that cannot. Those that can be controlled relate almost entirely to the individual, where as those that do not relate to both the individual (for example the interest in learning that they acquired due to their parents involvement) and the individuals external environment. In either case, in this study, these factors are subject to the following assumptions; that the individual achieved the required grades to attend the university that he/she is at, that a 1st class degree is based on individual performance rather than a weighting amongst peers, and that there are no extraordinary factors or mitigating circumstances that might affect attainment. Controllable factors based on the student at the start point of the course, centre around the students ability/determination to learn. The largest controllable factor must be the amount of study that the student undertakes. A 1st class degree requires a student to perform above expectation and in general this would mean studying more effectively for longer. If the student is able to study for longer, then they should achieve a better grade, and given that the amount of time dedicating to study is essentially up to the student within a certain limit, this factor may be controllable. Distance to the library etc and other factors that affect the amount of study performed may also be down to the individual student. The quality of study is also a controllable factor. The more effective a student is during this study time, the more likely they are to achieve a 1st class degree. This could be controlled by reducing the negative impact of external factors on studying. For example, getting more sleep so the student is alert, or having the correct surroundings for studying (i.e. reducing noise levels). Though the student social life may be detrimental to this, it is controllable by the student, and it is the student who may make a choice between spending time socialising over studying. The correct education and choice of course is a controllable factor in attaining a 1st class degree. A student who has chosen to study a course that they find easier and that they are more capable at may achieve this grade. Whereas the choice to study a 'harder' degree where their core competencies do not lie, may be detrimental. Essentially, the controllable factors come down to the student's determination to succeed. A more determined student may forgo the temptations of a social life, may study harder, spend less time on other activities, and focus more on their studies. The controllable factor is essentially one of will power and may be determined by the individual's willingness to succeed, and the perceived reward of attaining a 1st class degree. Uncontrollable factors relate to the student, and their external environment (the University). The uncontrollable factors relating to the student are around genetics and natural preference. The genetics of the students are uncontrollable; they may naturally be less intelligent and incapable of a 1st class degree. They may not have the intelligence to perform, or the natural drive to attain a 1st class degree. They may also simply be happy with another class degree. Regarding natural preference, it is known that people learn in different ways, and that different methods suit different people. It may be the case that a student's preferred learning method is in contrast to the method taught at the university or the choice of course. A lecturer teaching in a particularly oral manner is an uncontrollable factor for a student whose naturally preferred learning method is through visualisation. The quality of Lecturers is an uncontrollable factor for the student. Though they may have chosen the university they attended, they may have little influence over the lecturers they have. A poor lecturer may result in a lower quality of learning for the student. The standard of the University is important, but in particular, the standard of the university compared to the standard of the student. An average student may be much more capable of attaining a 1st class degree at a lower level university than at a top university. As such, the student has no control over the standards set by the university. The quality and interpretation of marking and communication is another uncontrollable factor. A tutor with many papers to mark may miss key points made by students, misread, or aggregate marks. As such the quality and accuracy of marking is uncontrollable, but could equally affect the student in either direction unless there is a preference for the marker towards an average (of which a 1st class grade is of course not). Finally, there is an uncontrollable element of luck: each student may only have time in the course to study certain elements, and the questions that come up in exams may suit the topics they are better at, or worse at. They may pick a dissertation topic that they later find out is particularly tricky.

Part 2: Apply means-end analysis to this situation and devise a plan of action. (40 marks)

Means-end analysis takes an individual objective goal, and a current situation, and then attempts to reduce the gap between the two. The Means-End Analysis covers several key points: Identifying the end goal, defining the goals necessary to reach the end state, describing the current situation, analysing the resources required to achieve these states, and planning their attainment. In this case the end goal is the achievement of a 1st class degree. Of course it is perfectly reasonable that the 1st class degree is not the end point for the individual, and that in fact the degree is an enabler for them to achieve a further end, for example attaining a good job, or respect amongst peers etc. The goals necessary to reach a 1st class degree may be specific to the course. But in this case we will make assumptions; that the student is on a 3 year degree course, that the first year has no impact on the degree, but is a foundation year, that the second and third year are weighted 40% and 60% respectively, of which 30% in the final year is a dissertation, and that the non-dissertation marks totalling 70% are based on annual exams in the 2nd and 3rd years. The final assumption is that the student needs 70% to achieve a 1st class degree. The goals, and plan for this student are therefore:
  • To use the first year in such a way that enables achievement of required grades in the 2nd and 3rd years.
  • To achieve 70% in the 2nd Year exams
  • To achieve 70% in the 3rd year exams
  • To achieve 70% in the dissertation
Describing the current situation is much simpler; the assumption is that the current start position is of a student at the start point of a degree course. They have no prior knowledge of the course topic, and no mitigating circumstances. The required resources to attain the stages described can be taken from the controllable factors in the first part of this analysis. The student must study for a sufficient amount of time, they must obtain a level of effectiveness in their studies (quality of study), they must have the correct education for the course, and must be determined enough to succeed that they would prioritise the attainment of a 1st class degree over other activities. These behaviours will ultimately affect all of the above stages. The final part of the means-end analysis is to plan the attainment of these goals, which can be done by taking the behaviours and resources required to meet the individual stages, and marking specific requirements against them, and by specifying specific aims that will enable attainment of the specific goals: Year 1:
  • Aim to achieve 70% in the first year exams, despite them mark not counting towards the overall degree grade. This will embed the behaviours required to achieve this grade, in preparation for the qualifying years.
  • Attempt to use the first year to identify the topics that are most suitable to the student. Identify those which the student can achieve the best marks in, and then try to carry these topics and module choices through to the final 2 years.
  • Aim to set specific working times, and standards for quality of study in the first year such that they become habit by the 2nd and 3rd years. An example could be studying in silence, or making a routine for trips to the university library that becomes habit.
  • Use this year to identify the student's preferred learning method.
Year 2:
  • Continue to maintain standards of quality in work, by setting a stringent study timetable, encompassing rewards as a motivation.
  • For the period before the annual exams dedicate more time to study/revision, and less to social life or other activities.
  • Ensure during the year that a suitable learning method has been found and is being utilised.
  • Aim to identify the lecturers and tutors that the student benefits most from, and utilising their expertise.
Year 3:
  • Again, continue to maintain standards of quality in work, by setting a stringent study timetable, encompassing rewards as a motivation, but also tailor to the specific project of the dissertation.
  • Effectively plan the dissertation such that the optimal use of time is made throughout the year, and that it does not affect final exam preparations.
  • Make full use of learning methods examined.
  • Attempt to over-prepare in all areas such that the element of luck in exam questions/marking failures is eliminated.
If a student were to follow this plan they would give themselves the best possible chance of overcoming the controllable factors, and achieving a 1st class degree. As demonstrated, the uncontrollable factors have a significant role to play in the outcome, but given the actual amount of work required to achieve the grade, any student that has met university entry requirements should be able to achieve it.

Part 3: Produce and present a PowerPoint presentation summarising the above analysis. (20 marks)

(See separate Document)

Bibliography

Aurifeille, J.-M. (1995) 'Determination of the dominant means-end chains: constrained clustering approach.' International Journal of Research in Marketing 12 (3) pp. 267-278. Gutman, J (1982) 'A means-end chain model based on consumer categorization processes.' Journal of Marketing 46 pp. 60-72. Klein, G (1998) Sources Of Power: How People Make Decisions. The MIT Press. Walker, B. A. (1991) 'Means-end chains: Connecting products with self.' Journal of Business Research 22 pp. 111-119. Woodside, A (2005) Market-Driven Thinking: Achieving Contextual Intelligence. Butterworth-Heinemann.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Gaining Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

English Language Essay Example

>Outline some of the functions of language and comment on how language can be said to be a social instrument

Throughout history, language “its origins, diversity, and dynamic nature” has fascinated scholars. Indeed, their fascination has even been preserved”just as most historical records have been”thanks to language itself. Undoubtedly, in language humans have their ultimate means of communication (Whitehead 1996).

From the moment they are born, babies seem to want to communicate. This communication involves facial expressions, gestures and body language and verbal and sign language. Language of all kinds uses an agreed code which develops according to the cultures in which they arise (Pinker 1994). The rhythms, tone and melody of language are of great importance as language develops. The gestures and movements of the face and hands are also extremely important and are all part of the conventional symbols of that particular culture (Whitting 1992). 

The child learns to speak slowly through observation. Somebody makes a special sound when something comes into sight or makes this noise, or when the baby sees it and looks at it. Then he will make the same noise himself, and the sound has been found to have an effect.

The infant gradually learns that particular sounds are intimately connected with certain objects, and that making that sound seems to control it in some way (Barnes 1995). He finds assistance in learning to talk through the observation made by his other senses and further help is derived from the people around him. Through language he is being accepted into society very gradually. It is by communicating his own thoughts, or acknowledging those of others, that he is regarded as making a contribution and of being on equal footing with those around him. There is much debate whether we are born with the skills and abilities necessary for speech or whether we develop them because of our environment.

This is often referred to as the nature versus nurture debate (Barnes 1998). There are several theories of how babies and children acquire language.

Some are based on the idea that learning a language is an instinct and others that children learn to communicate because they are exposed to language as part of a process of socialisation (Pinkers 1994). There is no doubt that children are born with a predisposition to learn, talk and listen. 

Children learn to talk partly because they are born genetically equipped to do so, and partly through the people they meet and communicate and socialise with. So what exactly are some of the functions of language for the child? The positive relationships and communications between people who respect each other is one of the most important factors in language development and in the development of the child’s thinking. To be part of a culture is a need human beings are born with (Barnes 1998).

Children therefore need to learn a language in order to understand themselves and those around them. It is through language that they communicate with others and share their experiences. It is also through language that they are able to represent and express new ideas as well as complex matters.

Children are in difficulty when they are not able to put their feelings into words or express then in any way (Whitting 1992). This has a damaging impact of the development of their self-esteem. Talking about feelings is just as important as talking about idea, and children who cannot express their feelings often have tantrums or show other kinds of challenging behaviour.

Language is also important for a child from the point of view of talking to oneself. Children find it helpful to think through different ideas and they like to talk about their feelings. They also need to talk through their frustrations when things are not going according to plan. They need to organise their thoughts and plan what they are going to do. Just as many adults talk to themselves when they think things over, so too do children.

When we look at language development, we can see that a young child thinks from their own point of view. 

Some psychologists have suggested that thinking is not possible without language, and language and thought are often considered to be particularly closely linked (Lee et al 1995). Language development is part of symbolic behaviour and is often called the period of symbolic development. Language development is deeply linked with the processes of representation and communication which means it makes is easier to represent (keep hold of experiences) and to communicate (to share these experiences with others).

Richard Dawkins, the biologist, refers to language as part of the social evolution of human beings. 

The desire to communicate starts at birth. Babies learn quickly how to get their needs met by cooing, crying and making eye contact with their primary carers. Language and the ability to communicate can radically affect nearly all areas of a child’s overall development.

Language is considered to be the main tool by which a child is able to develop their thought processes. Words are often the tool by which they store information. Being able to use language allows children to express themselves and communicate in a variety of ways and because of this, there is a strong link between children’s social skills and their language skills. The need for language and communication skills in everyday life means that in practice, where children have some communication difficulty, their social development may be affected (Walley 1994). So how do infants accomplish the feat of learning to speak, which is so important for the rest of their cognitive development? Primarily through verbal interactions with the parents. 

Infants especially respond to human stimuli. A baby imitates its mother’s voice although, interestingly, babies do not imitate all sounds. For example, the baby does not insert the cradle squeaks that have occurred simultaneously with the mother’s speech.

Parents of varied cultural backgrounds speak to their babies using the same rhythmic speaking style that some call Parentese. As the parent speaks in a loving way, the heart rate of the infant increases (Bartholomew et al 1999). This is believed to assist in hastening the connection between words and the objects they denote. Without saying a word, the infant is calling out: Talk to me! It is important to understand that although most children vary in their rate of development, there seems to be a pattern to the way children learn language and communication skills from their carers. When we study human language we are approaching what some might call the ‘human essence,’ the distinctive qualities of mind that are, so far as we know, unique to man (Holt 1991). 

Children as young as 3 years of age already possess a remarkable knowledge of language structure and syntax which is so complex and precise that it must challenge any known learning theory to account for its acquisition. (Oates 1995) Smiling, laughing and crying are universal communicative signals found in all cultures. A baby will use cries to signal he is hungry, lonely or distressed.

At an early age, from 3 months onwards, the infant can recognise a carer’s voice and, as he gets older, he is more inclined to cry out for attention. In this manner, he is using his limited language ability to gain instant gratification from his carer. As he reaches a year old, he is able to understand a few simple words and enjoys social interaction with his careers. By two years, new words are learnt quickly and he begins to use questions and explore his surroundings with great keenness (Arnold 1999). 

Throughout each stage of the child’s life, language is used as a stepping stone which enable him to find out more about himself and his surroundings. Language needs to accompany actions. When an adult lifts a baby and says ‘Up we go’, it is important that the adult then describes what is happening (Pinkers 1994).

Actions help children understand what is being said to them. Language is important for abstract thinking and children learn to think through a variety of different ways of symbolically representing their ideas, experiences, feelings and relationships. When we think about cognition, we are referring to the child thinking and having ideas and concepts. With metacognition, children begin to think about their own thinking. They reflect on their own ideas and begin to understand when they have made mistakes.

The next step in language is metalinguistics when the child begins to think about what they say. Eventually they are able to put their ideas into words and this helps them to put their emotions into words (Oates 1995). 

At each stage, the child is using different functions of language: as a means of action; putting thoughts into words; expressing feelings; communicating with others; understanding his own feelings. The first few years of a child’s life are essentially years of exploration and adventure, sometimes pleasant, sometimes quite the reverse. Some of the functions for language for the child is that of answering their questions.

It is unfortunately not realised by many grown people that children are living mentally in a world quite different from their parent and other adult people. Having decided then that the child’s questioning faculty must not be suppressed, the questions is, how best to deal with his questions. Children demand to ask countless questions and sometimes unanswerable things. Language is a means of teaching good manners. 

Really good manners are the expression of the child’s character and show that he is thinking of other people’s happiness and comfort. This is a function that stems from the basic linguistic skills which were the basis for the new born child. Independence is another function of language.

Now a ‘mother fixation’ begins fist of all by a child’s clinging far too much to his mother. Relying on her for everything, having no will of his own becoming fiendishly jealous of everyone who becomes between him and his beloved parent. There are numerous strategies in place to overcome such independences, Another function of language is the feeling of jealousy and anxiety about the arrival if the next baby. This can be helped by allowing children to take out their aggressive feeling on a soft toy. This channels the aggression and gives the child permission to express their feelings.

Parents are inundated with tips when a new baby comes along whilst baby number one is still very young. Children listen with interest when others speak, and do not dominate conversations. People will overlook a mispronounced word or a slip in grammar, but they will not warm to someone who wants to talk but not listen.

It is important to make time to talk about the new baby just as much as the established baby. Infants can pick up in insincere speech on the part of their parents and they know instinctively if they are being pushed out. There are many books on the market which try to help parents identify and develop the various functions of language for their infants. It is important to take an interest in life and the things around you and read widely but judiciously (Bartholomew et al 1999). 

The child will learn from you and language will gain an important part of their life too. When discussing what you learn, temper your conversation with modesty and humility. Enlarge your vocabulary”but with practical words, not showy terms that draw attention to the speaker.

Speak clearly, and pronounce words correctly. But avoid sounding overly precise or affected. When we speak articulately and refrain from slurring words or clipping off word endings, we dignify our speech and do a kindness to our children who are listening intently Babies’ brains are sponges soaking up their surroundings. In two years their processors learn a complex language just by hearing it. If the child hears two, he learns both.

Not only language but also musical and artistic abilities, muscular coordination, moral values and conscience, faith and love and the urge to worship”all spring from capacities and potentials pre-programmed into baby brains. They only await input from the environment for their development.

Also, there is a correct timetable for this input to come for the best results, and that advantageous time is during the formative years. Very early on the child is aware of the pleasure he derives from feeling his own breath being slowly inspired and expired. 

The passage of air over the lips, the slight tickling sensation apparent as they are first approximated and then separated, the vibrations in oral and naval cavities, will give the child untold delight. The pleasure lies in the conscious control of his own activity – his own power over language (Lee et al 1995). It is absurd to imply that language is not a social instrument when quite clearly the pleasure lies in the conscious control of his own activity, in the child’s possessions and demonstration of power.

The child finds assistance in learning to talk though the observation made by his other senses and through linking together these special sounds with the objects that seem to have made them. Not only will the child use the simplest of gestures, grimaces, cries, or other sounds when words fail to express ideas and needs, but adults will frequently make use of the same method, when ordinary words do not convey the right meaning to a child (Minnet 1994). Most child developmentalists state that the discoveries of philology show that during the development of speech in the individual child, the same stages are followed as in the course of cultural progress in any race (Whitting 1992). 

The lowest stage of all in the use of sounds is that of the simple cry, which primarily is a reflex action, denoting discomfort and acting as an emotional discharge. When the child discovers that constant repetition of a cry produces certain results, it can be deduced that mental processes connected with it are possible. The cry language therefore expresses the needs of the very young baby and serves the purpose of summoning assistance (Oates 1995).

The child proceeds from a simple cry to gestures and grimaces, which are practically the same except a different part of the body is used as the agent in each. The baby adopts his own version of Sign Language and can become surprised and distressed should someone be left in charge who does not understand his own particular Sign Language, and consequently fails to give the right response. 

Before long, the infant realises he can make sounds with his mouth and then discovers the use of words (Arnold 1999). It is extremely difficult to assign any precise age to the acquisition of speech, since children vary so widely in the speed at which they pass from one stage to another. One child will begin to say a few words with certainty at nine months, while another will be a year old before they first attempt to repeat any word.

Children have an intuitive understanding of the meaning of words in any language, whether they are familiar with it or not. It seems likely that the basis of this understanding is their instinctive power of interpretation of gesture and facial expression which will accompany the spoken words (Arnold 1999) The child knows that the gesture and facial expression, the accompanying touch are all indicative of the underlying intention and are practically the same in all countries. However, in other cultures, gesture and facial expression are used far more than in our own. The child is extremely accurate in associating ideas and is very particular to keep all the links already forged quite separate from one another (Drummond 1993). 

The child originally hears all sounds as patterns and people who talk with a slightly different accent or intonation from that which the child is familiar will be entirely unintelligible, as though they were talking in a foreign language Every language is a unique and uniquely important way to make sense of the world. Language is a palette of sounds, a dictionary of words made up of those sounds, and a grammar of rules for combining the words meaningfully. Every child that learns to speak practices sounds, builds up a dictionary and works out a set of rules.

Every child does this all largely unconsciously, with incomplete help and unreliable guidance from parents and friends and teachers who, themselves are only half conscious of the rules. And so the numerous functions of language enable young people to be heard, to cry out in pain, to acknowledge agreement, to express hunger, thirst, anger, pain, sadness, bewilderment, contentment, joy and love. It is through such a miraculous invention that language can be said, not just to be a social instrument, but the main social instrument.

<
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

English Language Essay Example. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Disabilities Essay Download Pdf

A large number of children are being deprived of their right to study. Education is important to be able to build a better nation. However there are some cases wherein children are being banned from going to school because of their disability. Issues are arising and they need to be answered. Inequalities, especially in education, are not acceptable. This paper is about the strengths and weaknesses of inclusion and integration policies and support for children with special educational needs. To fully understand the subject it is best to define the issues and concepts involved. A review on research and studies done on education for special children will be presented. In the article written by Anastasia Vlachou (2008) she shows awareness on teachers to change their view regarding inclusion. Integration has been reported that requires change, creates discomfort and involves a considerable challenge to those whose careers, work and social relationships reinforce a segregated system. According to Vlachou (2008), "it would be naAve to believe that integration policy will happen as part of a natural evolution in attitudes towards students with special needs.' Vlachou (2008) article will be discussed in the literature review together with the study done by several researchers. At the end of the paper the personal view of the writer regarding the subject will be presented. The inequalities and issues will be summarized to support the writers claim in the conclusion.

Definition of Terms

To fully understand what the topic is, it is best to define the important terms used in the paper. Inclusion as defined in the Webster dictionary – "to put in or consider as part of a group or category". McBrien and Brandt of Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development define inclusion as based on the situation of the disabled child in school. The practice of educating children in one classroom, including children with physical, mental, and developmental disabilities is important. Inclusion classes often require a special assistant to the classroom teacher. The 1975 Education for All Handicapped Children Act (P.L. 94-142) made inclusion a controversial topic by requiring a free and appropriate education with related services for each child in the least restrictive environment possible, and an Individualized Education Program (IEP) for each qualifying child. In 1991, the bill was renamed the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA) and the revision broadened the definition of disabilities and added related services. (Hummel,2008).

Another definition of inclusion is defined in the website of teachernet.com. "One of the greatest challenges facing schools is the provision of appropriate learning opportunities for all pupils. Within schools there are pupils with a range of abilities from different cultures, religions and social backgrounds. Some of these pupils experience barriers to learning as a result of their disability, heritage, gender, special educational need, ethnicity, social group, sexual orientation, race or culture. Research has proved that children from lower socio-economic backgrounds and/or specific ethnic and social groups are more likely to underachieve at school. This may lead to disaffection, low self-esteem, and marginalisation by others and, in some cases, formal exclusion from school. (www.teachernet.com). Some schools are more successful than others in meeting the needs of pupils from diverse backgrounds." Mason, H. (2003) of Birminghan, UK presented process of inclusion in education:

  • Increasing the participation of students with disabilities in, and reducing their exclusion from, curricula and communities of local schools;
  • Restructuring the cultures, policies and practices in schools so that they respond to the diversity of students' needs;
  • Accepting diversity as normal and as a rich source for all students;
  • Responding to the diverse needs of all students;
  • Accommodating both different styles and rates of learning;
  • Ensuring the quality of education to all students through appropriate curricula, support and teaching strategies;
  • Accepting that inclusion in education is one aspect of inclusion in society.

Another important term to define is the word integration. Integration traditionally refers to the education of children with special needs in mainstream settings. (Mason,H. 2003). Organ (1993) defines the term integration that pertains to a social domain; it does and should refer to individuals of different background who opt to interact.

Review of Literature

The review contains the study done by researchers on inclusion and integration policies in education of children with special needs. The article written by Schwartz, Odom and Sandall (1999), includes their research and found out that most of successful inclusive programs view inclusion as that starting point for all children. Children with disabilities are not expected to "earn" their way into early childhood programs by having the necessary "entry" skills (e.g. toilet training, communicating in sentences). ( Schwartz, Odom and Sandall, 1999), Programs may need to make special accommodations to make the inclusive experience successful. Jimmy lacked many of the skills that were typical of his four-year-old classmates; but the classroom teacher, itinerant teacher, and assistant teacher, with the help of the other classmates, arranged activities in ways that encouraged and even required Jimmy to participate. (Schwartz, Odom and Sandall,1999), This view of inclusion is based on the belief that inclusion can be appropriate for all children; making it work successfully depends on planning, training, and support

References

  1. The Language of Learning: A Guide to Education Terms, by J. L. McBrien and R. S. Brandt, 1997, Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development https://www.teachernet.gov.uk https://www.icevi-europe.org/tt/ttw3/topic5.html
  2. Dr Heather Mason, Birmingham, UK Publication Date: Wednesday Aug 13, 1997 The true definition of integration Henry Organ https://www.paloaltoonline.com/weekly/morgue/spectrum/1997_Aug_13.GUEST130.html
  3. Including Young Children with Special Needs by Ilene S. Schwartz, Samuel L. Odom, and Susan R. Sandall https://www.newhorizons.org/spneeds/inclusion/information/schwartz3.htm#author
  4. School Site https://www.atocbkk.com/school_site.php https://www.ccboe.net/Teachers/Hummel_Heather/onlineresources.html
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Disabilities Essay Download Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Learning Disabilities Essay Example for College Students

What are the challenges to the inclusion of children with those difficulties and how can they be overcome?

Introduction

The DSM-V (APA, 2013) has recently revised the diagnosis of learning disability into a single category, specific learning disabilities (SLD), in order to emphasise the fact that children tend to experience general difficulties in academic abilities and that such difficulties are inter-related. SLD in DSM-V are classified under neurodevelopmental disorders and it is stated that a diagnosis is dependent on impairment in the child's learning using specific academic skills such as reading, writing or arithmetic, which then disrupt further academic learning (Tannock, 2014). Typically, children are recognised as having a difficulty in certain areas of learning when they begin formal education, the difficulties can occur in different cultural groups and without interventions can persist into adulthood (Tannock, 2014). One area of difficulty experienced by children is dyslexia which occurs predominately in the domain of reading in the English language. Dyslexia mainly involves a problem when learning the correspondence between letters and sounds (Rose 2009; Snowling, 2013). Therefore the aspect of SLD to be focused on in the following essay will be dyslexia, the challenges encountered with this impairment and ways in which the challenges may be addressed.

Specific Learning Disabilities

The diagnostic criteria for SLD in the DSM-V, involves firstly an overall diagnosis of SLD and secondly the identification of specifiers. The specifiers identify the key characterisation of the disorder in the three academic domains of reading, writing and arithmetic. The diagnosis also involves a child demonstrating one of six symptoms over a 6 month period, which is persistent despite receiving any intervention strategies. Furthermore, the child's abilities in the academic domain are below those of other children of the same age and cause disruption in academic and everyday activities (APA, 2013). In order to be diagnosed with SLD other conditions, for example, other neurological conditions or psychological issues must be excluded (APA, 2013). The key difference for a diagnosis of a learning disorder is the change from specific subtypes (reading disorder, mathematics disorder and written expressive disorder) in DSM-IV to one overarching condition (SLD) in DSM-V. One component of SLD is dyslexia, although terms such as dyslexia or dyscalculia are no longer used in the same way as they were previously in DSM-IV (Tannock, 2014).

Inclusive Education

Warnock, Norwich and Terzi (2010) define inclusive education as providing each child with an opportunity to be educated in a mainstream school. One of the central principles of inclusive education is that each child's needs are assessed and there is flexibility to respond to their differences and individual requirements. In the UK, the aim is to educate all children with different needs in mainstream schools, including those children with SLD. The rationale behind this philosophy is that segregating children with special educational needs (SEN) from their typically developing peers does not prepare them for adult life when they will be expected to integrate into society (Fisher, Roach, and Frey, 2002). Furthermore, inclusive education aims to develop tolerance and understanding towards others and promote social cohesion (O'Gorman and Drudy, 2011). Children with SEN are defined as having 'a significantly greater difficulty in learning than the majority of children his age' (Department for Education and Science, DfES, 1981, p.1). Each child should be assessed by professionals to determine the level of support required which is detailed in a statement of needs (DfES, 1981). Inclusive education should include 'children of all backgrounds irrespective of gender, religion, class, ethnicity or any other characteristic', thereby including children with diverse types of SEN (O'Gorman and Drudy, 2011, p.4). However, one challenge faced by all children with SEN is that they are not a homogenous group and some children do not thrive in an inclusive environment and may instead experience less stress and anxiety in a specialist school environment (Cigman, 2007). As suggested by Lewis and Norwich (2005), inclusive education is not just assimilating children with SENs into a mainstream schools; instead, the emphasis should be on 'developing an education system in which equity is striven for and diversity is welcome' (Lewis and Norwich, 2005, p.xi).

Dyslexia

There are a number of definitions of dyslexia, all of which include a similar theme of difficulties in reading 'accurately and with fluency' (Hulme and Snowling, 2009, p.37). According to Rose (2009), dyslexia is a continuum of disorders ranging from mild to severe and is not related to the IQ of an individual. Rose also supports the DSM-V perspective of SLD not being separate categories but being inter-related with other impairments in motor co-ordination, attention, working memory and organisational skills. Dyslexia, as mentioned previously is characterised by an inability to recognise a relationship between sounds, letters and words, which is known as phonological awareness (Hulme and Snowling, 2009). It is important to distinguish between children who are poor readers, as they can also demonstrate difficulties in phonological awareness. Poor readers may have difficulties because of poor pre-school literacy or perhaps if they are from families where English is not the first language used. However, children with dyslexia additionally show a core difficulty of word decoding which affects spelling and oral language skills (Snowling, 2013).

Challenges facing children with SLD and Dyslexia

There are a number of challenges that face children with SLD and although they are not a homogenous group, the issues they face can be common to all children who have SEN. First, not all children are happy in an inclusive mainstream school. Kavale and Forness (2000) report that historically, children with SEN were taught in specialist schools which had small classes and specialist teachers. There was also more differentiation between different types of SEN and therefore a more heterogeneous and individual approach to the children who had certain needs. However, it has also been argued by Kavale and Forness (2000) that there is limited evidence that specialised education is any different to inclusive education in mainstream schools in developing the academic or social skills of SEN pupils. Kerins (2014) found that many children in Ireland with mild-learning disabilities were leaving mainstream schools and transferring to specialised schools. A similar finding of children with SEN leaving mainstream schools for specialist schools is reported by Kelly, Devitt, O'Keeffe and Donovan (2014). A further challenge that can affect many pupils with SEN is bullying by non-disabled peers, which occurred within mainstream schools and also among children in special schools, who were bullied outside of the school environment (Lewis and Norwich, 2005).A  The findings in Lewis and Norwich's (2005) study are supported by Frederickson (2010), who found that children with SEN were typically not accepted, frequently rejected and tended to be the victims of bullying more often than typically developing children. In order to overcome the challenge of bullying, Frederickson (2010) found that positive and supportive peer relationships developed if the impairment was severe and obvious; often learning disorders are not obvious, particularly if they are mild SLD. It was also found that older peers were more accepting if they understood the nature of the special needs, although schools were found to be reluctant to discuss pupil's SEN as they were concerned about labelling. Frederickson (2010) argues that positive relationships can develop between pupils with SEN and typically developing pupils if the school promotes respect and emphasises caring relationships. Norwich and Kelly (2004) investigated the views of children aged between 10 and 14 who had statements for moderate learning difficulties. It was found that the majority of mainstream children preferred to receive support away from other children, which may have been related to the very high rate of bullying reported by the children. In examining the more specific challenges faced by children with dyslexia, these include the failure of adults, such as parents and teachers, to detect and recognise the signs that indicate the child is failing in their ability to read (Snowling, 2013). If interventions are not implemented early, the child may become frustrated and unmotivated at school, developing a low self-esteem (Snowling, 2013).A  There will usually be a number of difficulties in many areas of their academic life and education that can continue into adulthood. A study undertaken by Nugent (2007) examined the parental perspectives of the education of their children with dyslexia in three different educational environments in Ireland - namely, special schools, separate specialist units within schools and resources in mainstream schools. The results of the postal questionnaire indicated that parents had positive perceptions of all three areas of provision. However, there was greater support by the parents for the specialist services in special schools and units than the provision in mainstream schools.

Addressing the Challenges

The importance of early identification can be addressed by assessing pre-school children's language skills, and early recognition of letters and the sounds of different letters (Snowling 2013). There also appears to be a genetic component to dyslexia as it is often seen in different members of the same family (Nash, Hulme, Gooch and Snowling, 2013). In their study, Nash et al. explored the literacy skills of preschool children at family risk from dyslexia in comparison to a group of typically developing children of the same age and a third group of children with other language deficits. Both groups of children at risk from language impairment showed phonological deficits and, there was an overlap for both language conditions, further supporting the more generalised classification of SLD found in the DSM-V. Screening pre-school children is expensive and therefore it is important that teachers are able to identify when a child is failing to respond to effective teaching methods - particularly in relation to the progress of children who are the same age (Snowling, 2013). The type of teaching methods include provision for children who may be slow learners and who are provided with the opportunity to catch-up with their peers. However, Rose (2009) argues that intervention strategies that are used with poor readers or slow learners do not provide evidence of improvement in the reading ability of children with dyslexia.A  If a child fails to achieve a certain level with early intervention strategies they can receive additional individual support. This can be monitored as children are assessed at regular intervals during their formal education (Snowling, 2013). Rose (2009) argues that intervention strategies for children with dyslexia must be highly structured, systematic and implemented regularly so there is that constant reinforcement and the generalisation of reading skills. O'Gorman and Drudy (2011) report that the positive attitudes of teachers towards children with SEN is an important factor in the success of their education. Attitudes of teachers towards pupils with SEN tend to reflect the severity of the disorder and the role of the special educational needs co-ordinator (SENCo) is highly relevant to the successful inclusion of children with SEN in UK mainstream schools.

Conclusion

Children with learning disabilities do not tend to experience one specific learning disability. The DSM-V (APA, 2013) reflects this perspective by categorising learning difficulties as one group (SLD), which appears to be necessary because impairments often overlap and children can experience difficulties in more than one area. Snowling (2013) and Rose (2009) support the DSM-V perspective that dyslexia is a multi-faceted disorder. There are a number of challenges for children with dyslexia. If the condition is not diagnosed early when the child is young and which enables interventions to be implemented, this can have a negative effect for the future of the child. Children can experience a lack of motivation and low self -esteem which can affect their educational achievement and also have a negative affect when they are adults. Snowling (2013) therefore stresses the importance of early detection and early intervention strategies for children at risk from dyslexia, particularly if there is a family history (Nash et al. 2013). In general, children with SLD can experiencing bullying (Lewis and Norwich, 2005; Frederickson 2010) and it has been found recently that many children with SEN have left mainstream schools in preference for specialist schools (Kelly et al. 2014; Kerins, 2014). These findings may also be related to the bullying of SEN pupils by their typically developing peers. Not all children thrive in inclusive mainstream schools, although the principles of inclusive education are to help a child achieve their full potential during their formal education and also to facilitate tolerance and an inclusive community. References American Psychiatric Association (2013). Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th edition. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association. Cigman, R. (2007). Included or Excluded? The Challenge of the Mainstream for some SEN Children. Oxford: Routledge. Department for Education and Science, DfES (1981). Education Act. London: Her Majesty's Stationary Office, DfES Fisher, D., Roach, V., and Frey, N. (2002). Examining the general programmatic benefits of inclusive schools. International Journal of Inclusive Education, 6(1), 63-78. Frederickson, N.L. (2010). Bullying or befriending? Children's responses to classmates with special needs. British Journal of Special Education, 37(1), 4-12. Hulme, C. and Snowling, M. (2009). Developmental Disorders of Language Learning and Cognition, Chichester: Wiley-Blackwell. Kavale, K.A. and Forness, S.R. (2000). History, rhetoric, and reality. Remedial & Special Education, 21(5), 279-296. Kelly, A., Devitt, C., O'Keeffe and Donovan, A.M. (2014). Challenges in implementing inclusive education in Ireland: Principle's views of the reasons students aged 12+ are seeking enrolment to special schools. Journal of Policy and Practice in Intellectual Disabilities, 11(1), 68-81 Kerins, P. (2014). Dilemmas of difference and educational provision for pupils with mild general learning disabilities in the Republic of Ireland. European Journal of Special Needs Education, 29(1), 47-58. Lewis, A. and Norwich, B. (Eds) (2005). Special Teaching for Special children? Pedagogies for Inclusion. Berkshire: Open University Press Nash, H.M., Hulme, C., Gooch, D. and Snowling, M.J. (2013). Preschool language profiles of children at family risk of dyslexia: continuities with specific language impairment. The Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 54(9), 958-968 Norwich, B. and Kelly, N. (2004). Pupil's views on inclusion: moderate learning difficulties and bullying in mainstream and special schools. British Educational Research Journal, 30(1), 43-65. Nugent, M. (2007). Comparing inclusive and segregated settings for children with dyslexia – parental perspectives from Ireland. Support for Learning, 22(2), 52-59 O'Gorman, E. and Drudy, S. (2011). Professional development for teachers working in special education/inclusion in mainstream schools: the views of teachers and other stakeholders. A Research Report part-funded by the National Council for Special Education, Special Education Research Initiative, Dublin. National Council for Special Education. Rose, J. (2009). Identifying and Teaching Children with Dyslexia and Literacy Difficulties. London, Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF). Snowling, M.J. (2013). Early identification and interventions for dyslexia: a contemporary view. Journal of Research in Special Education, 13(1), 7-14 Tannock, R. (2014). DSM-5 changes in diagnostic criteria for specific learning disabilities: What are the implications? International Dyslexia Association Retrieved on 3/10/2015 from: https://dyslexiahelp.umich.edu/sites/default/files/IDA_DSM-5%20Changes.pdf Warnock, M., Norwich, B. and Tersi, L. (2010). Special Educational Needs: A New Look. Second Edition Continuum International Publishing Group: London
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Learning Disabilities Essay Example for College Students. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Blood Brothers Essay Example for College Students

Compare how Willy Russell portrays the two mothers in “Blood Brothers”. Blood Brothers is a popular play by Willy Russell. It was written and first performed in 1981. The play tells of twin brothers, separated at birth, with one kept in a low-class family and the other is adopted into a wealthy family. The characters of Mrs Johnston and Mrs Lyons, the mothers, are total opposites. Mrs Johnston is a struggling, single mother of seven, with another two on the way, whereas Mrs Lyons is a privileged, yet childless, married woman.

When we are first introduced to Mrs Johnston, she is a single mother ever since her husband left her for a younger woman. She is a low–class Liverpudlian, who is extremely hardworking. Mrs Johnston is described as a woman in her thirties, but looks sixty, because of the stress of work and her children. Mrs Johnston stutters at times, when she’s under pressure, like when Mrs Lyons is persuading her to give away one of the twins, “Erm, well I think it’s the… but, Mrs Lyons, what…” Act 1 Scene 5. Mrs Johnston is shown as unsure and pressured into something she doesn’t want to do. The reader may find it disturbing, since not many mothers give away their children to their employers. Mrs Johnston realises what Mrs Lyons is talking about, but is still confused over the whole situation.

When she talks, ellipses are used to show that she pauses in her dialogue, because she is uncertain about the consequences to what she is about to do, “At er…” Act 1 Scene 5. She is hesitating because she is in doubt and hasn’t really decided. Mrs Johnston is lost for words and can’t think of anything to say.

Mrs Johnston is a superstitious lady, even though she denies it. The reader can see this in a scene between her and Mrs Lyons, “Mrs Lyons: [Twigging, laughing] Oh, you mean it’s superstition. You’re superstitious are you? The Mother: No. But you never put new shoes on a table.” Act 1 Scene 3. When Mrs Lyons laid shoes on the table, Mrs Johnston panicked. Mrs Lyons uses Mrs Johnston’s belief of superstition against her when trying to keep her ‘son’, Edward, one of the twins. Mrs Lyons contrasts really strongly against Mrs Johnston. At first, Mrs Lyons is shown as a bright person in her thirties, unlike the stressed Mrs Johnston who is the same age.

Mrs Lyons is an upper middle-class woman. She is also a very patronising woman, who is forceful and pressurising. Mrs Lyons uses negative views about extra children so that Mrs Johnston will have to give away one of the twins to her. She doesn’t do this in an aggressive way, but in a dangerously sweet manner, “Mrs Lyons: Already you’re being threatened by the Welfare. With two more how will you avoid some of them being put into care? Surely, surely, Mrs Johnston, it’s better to give one child to me than to have some of them taken into care! If he’s with me you’ll still be able to see him each day as you come into work.” Act 1 Scene 5. She gives Mrs Johnston reasons to give up a child.

Mrs Lyons is shown to be self-centred, “My husband is due back tomorrow! I must have my baby now.” Act 1 Scene 6. She doesn’t care about Mrs Johnston’s feelings, Mrs Lyons only wants the baby because if Mr Lyons returns and doesn’t see it, he will know that his wife was lying. Mrs Lyons is willing to take a child away from its mother, so that she can save her own skin. Mrs Lyons is a very sly and devious woman, as she uses superstition against Mrs Johnston, so that she can keep one of the twins, after Mrs Johnston tries to take him back, “Mrs Lyons: … You know what they say about twins secretly parted, don’t you? The Mother: [Terrified] What, what? Mrs Lyons: They say… they say that if either twin learns he was one of a pair they shall both die immediately! It means, Mrs Johnston, that these brothers shall grow up unaware of the other’s existence. They shall be raised apart, and never, never ever told what was once the truth.

You won’t tell anyone, Mrs Johnston, because if you do you shall kill them!” Act 1 Scene 8. Mrs Lyons is being dramatic, but she knows that Mrs Johnston is convinced, because she saw how Mrs Johnston overreacted when she put shoes on the table. Mrs Lyons is very manipulative, but she conceals it very well. This superstition ends up backfiring on Mrs Lyons because Mrs Johnston soon forgets about it, but it continues to haunt Mrs Lyons decades later. She becomes paranoid and obsessive, believing that Mrs Johnston is following her to tell Edward the truth. This shows the reader that the superstition affects her instead of Mrs Johnston, the person it was intended for.

When she is trying to convince Mrs Johnston to give away a twin, all she mentions is the materialistic advantages of her lifestyle, “The Mother: … He’d be able to play on those lawns wouldn’t he? And have his own room and… Mrs Lyons: If he grew up here… as our son… He could have everything.” Act 1 Scene 5. Although she agrees with everything Mrs Johnston says, Mrs Lyons never mentions if she would love the child as if it was hers. The reader could think that Mrs Lyons could give him everything apart from love.

The stage directions are in the text because Blood Brothers is a play. They are there because the dialogue doesn’t describe how the characters are reacting or what the scenery is like. The stage direction gives the reader an idea of what is happening, without giving too much away, “The Mother: [Terrified] What, what?” Act 1 Scene 8. If the stage directions weren’t given, the reader wouldn’t know how Mrs Johnston said it. She could have been curious or confused about the situation. The stage directions help with the reader’s imagination and interpretation of Blood Brothers.

The Narrator is also a very good dramatic device. He acts as a shadow of the other character. The Narrator is there as a reminder of Mrs Johnston and Mrs Lyons’ agreement. The other characters don’t acknowledge him which shows he is of a ghostly nature. The Narrator raises suspicion and builds up tension between the characters. He has no emotion and talks of the Devil, “There’s no use clutching at your rosary The Devil’s in the backyard, he can see Through the gaps in the curtains he sees it all, There’s no use hiding in the hall. When he raps at the knocker then he knows you’re in; No you won’t, no you’ll never get away from him No you won’t, no you’ll never get away from him.” Act 2 Scene 1. The Narrator is trying to tell Mrs Johnston and Mrs Lyons that their pact won’t work, because the truth will be known. He uses repetition and rhyme, so that his lines are more catchy and memorable.

The Narrator is a creepy and disturbing character because he knows the future and talks about the Devil, which makes him God-like and all seeing. He is a neutral character because he doesn’t choose sides and we don’t know anything about him, other than he knows the fate of each character. The Narrator also represents superstition because he is there throughout the play, reminding the reader of the lie Mrs Lyons told. The dialogue of the two families is very diverse. Mrs Johnston uses ‘common’ English and Mrs Lyons uses ‘standard’ English.

Mrs Johnston uses ‘common’ English in her dialect and many slang terms throughout the play, “Oh it’s, it’s smashing thank you, Mrs Lyons.” Act 1 Scene 3. This shows that she wasn’t brought up in a rich family or she wasn’t properly educated. Mrs Lyons uses ‘standard’ English in her language, since she is quite wealthy and possibly well educated. Instead of calling her son Eddie, she calls him Edward, “Edward! Edward it’s time for bed.” Act 2 Scene 3. Childhood is very prominent in the play. The reader can see a difference in the twins’ upbringing. Eddie seems to have grown up very fast because at the age of seven, he is already very polite and well spoken.

His parents have influenced him because he is like a miniature adult. The reader can see that Mrs Lyons was very overprotective when she brought Eddie up, because he is already familiar with things like dictionaries at such a young age, “Eddie: In the dictionary.

Don’t you know what a dictionary is?” Act 2 Scene 2. Eddie speaks like he has used a dictionary a lot, whereas Mickey doesn’t know what one is, but agrees to make himself look smarter. In contrast, Mickey is more wild and untamed. He plays childhood games, like mounted Police and Indians, and runs around with a toy gun. Mrs Johnston probably let him do whatever he wanted, because she had his other siblings to look after as well. This is something that Eddie never did, “We’re playing mounted Police, and Indians. I’m a Mountie. Mam, Mam, you know this morning we’ve wiped out three thousand Indians.” Act 2 Scene 1. A gun is mentioned throughout the play. At first, a harmless air gun is used a toy.

This symbolises the fate of the twins. The child versions think it’s just a toy used to vandalise, but as they grow up, real guns are used. At the end of the play, when Mickey feels that Eddie has taken everything away from him, he produces an authentic looking gun. Even then it isn’t real. The child and the adult Mickey thinks of guns as a relic of power. When Mrs Lyons moves to the countryside, she orders that poplars be planted, so that the council estate can’t be seen.

The poplars are a barrier between Mrs Lyons and Mrs Johnston. Mrs Lyons wants sever all ties with the Johnston family, but they manage to move to the countryside as well. Superstition plays a big part in Blood Brothers. With the Narrator as a constant reminder, the reader sees that Mrs Lyons’ superstition affects every character in the play.

Mrs Lyons is most affected. Simple things that a mother would tell a child would be nonsense to her, but knowing that Mrs Johnston is superstitious helped her get a child. At that point, superstition was an advantage to her. But when she faces the reality of what she has done, Mrs Lyons becomes deluded. The idea of motherhood and surrogacy is also present. Mrs Johnston and Mrs Lyons raise their sons very differently.

Mrs Johnston lets Mickey be carefree and wild, but he isn’t allowed to play near the ‘big houses in the park’. Mrs Lyons raises Eddie the way she desires, but he finds his way back to his biological family. She becomes insane because of Eddie’s bonds with his real family.

This reveals her real personality, compulsive and aggressive. Surrogacy is shown as a bad thing in Blood Brothers, because Mrs Johnston was reluctant to give away her child. Mrs Lyons’ manipulative personality is seen here, in her desperation to have a child, as she forces Mrs Johnston to give away her son. Blood brothers are also one of the themes mentioned. It started off as a child’s alliance to his friend, but carries on until adulthood.

The twins do forget about it at times in their life, but it keeps returning. The one who came up with the idea, Mickey, is the one who ends up dismissing it. He thinks nothing of it any more, “Eddie: [Pause] I thought… I thought we always stuck together. I thought we were… blood brothers. Mickey: That was kids’ stuff, Eddie, didn’t anyone tell you? [Pause. Mickey looking at him. An ironic snort] But I suppose you still are a kid, aren’t you?” Act 4 Scene 2. Social class and division is also mentioned. Whilst Mickey and Eddie overcome that boundary, their mothers haven’t. Mrs Johnston is treated very badly because of her low-class status.

When Mickey is in trouble with the police, the Policewoman is very patronising and shows Mrs Johnston no respect, “[to Mrs Johnston] And he was about to commit a serious crime, love, a serious crime. Now do you understand that? [The Mother nods] You don’t want to end up in court again do you? Eh? [Shakes her head] Because that’s what’s going to happen if I have any more trouble from one of yours… ” Act 2 Scene 7. The Policewoman uses a threatening tone and rhetorical questions, such as ‘Eh?’ She also uses repetition because she thinks that Mrs Johnston is poorly educated and inferior to her. Since Eddie was also there at the time, the Policewoman paid a visit to his house too, “As I say, it was more if a prank really, Mrs Lyons. I’d just dock his pocket money if I was you. But one thing I would say, and excuse me if I’m interfering, but I’d not let him mix with the likes of them in the future.

Make sure he keeps with his own kind, Mrs Lyons, not running round with them at the other end…” Act 2 Scene 7. The Policewoman is more polite to Mrs Lyons. She refers to the incident as a crime to Mrs Johnston, but tells Mrs Lyons it was a prank. She doesn’t use repetition with Mrs Lyons. She is inside Mrs Lyons’ house because Mrs Lyons is a respected woman and if the neighbours saw, people would talk. The Policewoman is very two-faced, treating one mother better because of her status.

The town, where the characters live, is separated. The reader can see a definite social division.

There is the wealthy ‘in the big houses near the park’ and the workers in the council estate.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Blood Brothers Essay Example for College Students. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Free Arab Culture Essays and Papers Pdf

Introduction

Arab societies are undergoing major changes as new patterns of marriage and family formation emerge across the region. For long decades, early marriage was the common pattern in the Arab world. However, it is no longer the only pattern. The average age of marriage is rising and more Arab women are staying single for a long time and sometimes they don't get married at all. These new marriage trends in the Arab World are part of a world global phenomenon. The changes of marriage trends in the Arab world reflect the social and economic changes taking place in the region. Arab economies moved away from agrarian based systems which supported both early marriage and extended family numbers [Hoda R.and Magued O., 2005]. The majority of the Arab populations live in cities working in industrial or service sectors. Today, Arab women are more educated and more likely to work outside their homes for personal and financial independence. These changes create a new image of woman and change her past traditional role as a mother and household member. The objective of this research is the studying of marriage issue in the Arab world because marriage is one of the key important factors that determine the social and economic present and future in the Arab countries. Both problems of early marriage and increase of average age of marriage of marriage are explained. Finally, a recommended solutions and actions are proposed in order to naturalize the two problems for decreasing the negative impacts and creation of better Arab societies.

Importance of Marriage in Arab Society

Family is the main concern in Arab societies. Family is considered the main social security system for young and elder people in Arab countries. In Arab culture, parents are responsible for children well into those children's adult lives, and children reciprocate by taking responsibility for the care of their aging parents—responsibilities that Arabs generally take on with great pride. Marriage for Arabs is thus both an individual and a family matter. In Arab societies, marriage is considered the turning point that defines prestige, recognition, and societal approval on both partners, particularly the bride. Marriage in Arab societies is considered the social and economic contract between two families. Marriage is also considered the right form of socially, culturally, and legally acceptable sexual relationship [1].

Early marriage in Arab World

Early marriage is any form of marriage that takes place at age of 18 years. Early marriages are often associated with enforcement. Forced marriage is the marriage conducted without full consent of both parties and sometimes with a threat [2].From human rights point of view, early marriage is considered a violation of human rights conventions. In Arab societies- especially developing countries- early marriage, is considered a means of securing young girls' future and protecting them. Wars and social problems may leads also to early marriage as in Palestine, where the intifada has led to earlier marriage. Many countries in the world have declared 18 as the minimum legal age of marriage. However, more than millions of young girls are expected to marry in the next decade according to the international statistics. [2]. Early marriage has decreased in many world countries in the last decades. However, it is still common in rural areas and among poor people. Poor parents believe that early marriage will protect their daughters and save their future. Young girls are forced into marriage by their families while they are still children because they think that marriage benefits them and secure their financial and social future. Early marriage violates children rights because it decreases their human development, leaving them socially isolated with little education, skills and opportunities for employment and self-realization. These conditions ultimately make married girls vulnerable to poverty .Early marriage is a health and human rights violation because it takes place within the context of poverty and gender inequality with social, cultural and economic dimensions [3].

Reasons of early marriage in Arab World

There different reasons of early marriage in Arab countries, some of these reasons are referred to cultural reasons, others are referred to economic reasons. Some of these reasons are: High poverty rates, birth rates and death rates, greater incidence of conflict and civil wars, lower levels of overall development, including schooling, employment, health care and believes that early marriage is a means of securing young girls' future and protecting them [4]. Traditional values surrounding girls' virginity and family honour play a major role in Arab families' decisions to marry off their daughters at young ages [1].

Effects of early marriage

Although the trend of early marriage is decreasing in the Arab world, the number of young girls in Arab countries teenagers who are married is still high. Early marriage is generally associated with early childbearing and high fertility, both of which pose health risks for women and their children [5]. Young mothers are at greater risk than older mothers of dying from causes related to pregnancy and childbirth. And the younger a bride is, the more significant the age gap with her husband tends to be—which exacerbates her disadvantage in negotiating with her husband on matters such as her own health care needs [6]. Young wives are required to do a many hard domestic duties, including new roles and responsibilities as wives and mothers. The young bride's status in the family is dependent on her demonstrating her fertility within the first year of marriage when she is not physiologically and emotionally prepared [7]. Young wives are forced to be responsible for the care and welfare of their families and future generations while they are still children themselves. They have no decision making powers, restricted mobility and limited economic resources. Early marriage is a direct cause of woman poverty and wide age gaps between younger married girls and their spouses create unequal power relations between the young bride and her older and more experienced husband, resulting in husbands having total control over sexual relations and decision-making [5]. Young wives are often unable to make wise plans for their families and may be forced to select between one of two hard choices: either to tolerate husbands' violence or to make crimes (killing them). AIDS epidemic increases in young women due to the combination socioeconomic, cultural and political factors that put young women at greater risk of HIV infection due to the lack of sexual knowledge and limited access to information and resources. Younger women may face unsuccessful marriages and divorce could happen as a result of lack of maturity, incomplete independence, limited time to get prepared for marriage and having kids, dealing with education/career building and family formation at the same time.

Relative Marriage in Arab World

Marriage between relatives is a significant feature in Arab societies. High rate of marriage between relatives is known as consanguinity. Marriage between relatives is clear in Arab countries such as Libya and Sudan. Sometimes, consanguineous marriage is arranged marriages that reflects the wishes of the marrying relatives. But marriage between close relatives can jeopardize the health of their offspring, as can marriage among families with a history of genetic diseases [1].

New trends in Marriage in Arab world

In the last decade, early marriage has declined in many Arab countries such as Kuwait and Emirates. For example , in Emirates, the pace of decline is very significant where the percentage of women ages 15 to 19 who were married dropped from 57 percent in 1975 to 8 percent by 1995 [1]. The general feature of marriage pattern in the for the region as a whole, women are marrying later in late of 20th or 30th and some women are not marrying at all. As shown in table (1), In Tunisia, Algeria, and Lebanon, only 1 percent to 4 percent of women ages 15 to 19 are married, and the percentage of women ages 35 to 39 who have never married in these countries now ranges from 15 percent to 21 percent. The percentage of women ages 35 to 39 who have never married is a good indicator for measuring changes in the universality of marriage, because the likelihood of a single woman marrying after age 40 is quite low [8]

Source:

Pan-Arab Project for Child Development: Arab Mother and Child Health; Council of Health Ministers of GCC States, Gulf Family Health Surveys; and Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics' special tabulations of the 2004 Palestinian Demographic and Health Survey . Palestinians have different marriage pattern where early is the most type that takes place. The main reason is the war and occupation where families wishes to increase the generation for freeing their countries and help them to face hard life in the region. As shown in figure (), most of Palatines marry in the age of 14 to 24 year old [1]. SOURCES: Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics, special tabulation, 2004 Palestinian Demographic and Health Survey. The marriage-age gap is particularly pronounced in Arab societies. One-quarter of recent marriages in Egypt and Lebanon had women at least 10 years younger than their husbands [9].

Marriage problem in Egypt

The main problem of marriage in Egypt is its high costs especially because of dowry, Shabka, Housing, Furniture and appliances and gihaz. Regardless of the economic situations of marrying couples and their families, the gihaz and other goods purchased to set up the newlyweds' home have to be new, not used. The rising cost of marriage is in part attributed to the rising expectations and consumerism that have accompanied the opening of the Egyptian economy, which began in the 1970s. The country's high cost of housing and furnishings have had a number of unintended consequences for marriage patterns, such as youth entering into urfi (common-law marriages that are unregistered and generally secretive) as well as men marrying women who are older and financially secured [10].

Nonconventional Forms of Marriage

The high costs of Arab marriage as well as high unemployment and economic difficulties are blamed for the spread of so-called “urfi” (or common law) marriages among young urban adults in some countries in the region. Generally hidden from the participants' families, urfi marriages are undertaken to avoid the difficulties of a standard marriage and give a sexual relationship some degree of legitimacy. The secrecy surrounding urfi marriages puts young women at a particular disadvantage because these women are not able to negotiate the terms of their marriage a role usually played by families in conventional marriages. There are thousands of urfi marriages cases in Egypt among university students [11]. Traditionally, urfi marriages have been religiously condoned as proper if the couple's parents approve of the marriage and there is a public announcement of the ban. Some families in rural villages opt for urfi marriages when the bride is too young to be legally married, deferring the official registration of the marriages to a future date. But the public, the religious establishment, and the legal system have generally perceived urban urfi marriages as a pretext and cover for premarital sex. Another form of unconventional marriage in the Arab World is the muta'a and messyar. Muta'a is a temporary marriage, which is practiced by the Shi'ites in southern Lebanon and other areas, couples specify in their marriage contract the date upon which the marriage ends. On ther hand, Messyar marriage is common in the Gulf region. In this type of marriage, there is an arrangement that man marries without any of the housing and financial responsibility that a standard Arab marriage generally requires of him. In general, Messyar and Muta'a are practiced mostly by men who are marrying a second wife where they tend to give legitimacy to sexual relationships and reduce the number of never married women in society, they introduce other social complications, such as the upbringing of children from such marriages [1].

Women's rights regarding marriage

According to the international human rights conventions, woman has the rights when entering, during and at the end of the marriage. When entering marriage, woman has the same right as a man to enter marriage only with full consent. A woman married under minimum age shouldn't be considered legally married. Marriage must be registered in an official registry. If a woman marries someone with another nationality, she will not have her nationality automatically changed to that of her husband unless she chooses that [12]. During marriage, woman has the same rights and responsibilities as man. She has the right to equal access to health services, the right of protection from violence within the family. She also has the same rights as a man to decide freely about the number and spacing of children and to have access to information, education and means to exercise these rights [12]. Woman has the same rights and responsibilities as her husband towards children regardless of her marital status and family benefits. Change in woman's husband nationality during marriage doesn't imply that her nationality must be change. If woman is employed she must not be discriminated against on the grounds of marriage and maternity. At the end of marriage, woman has the same rights as man when a marriage ends. Neither woman nationality nor that of her children shall automatically be affected by the ending of a marriage. Woman has the same rights and responsibilities as a man towards her children regardless of her marital status [12].

How to solve the problem?

There is an urgent need to for a better understanding of the social and economic environment surrounding Arab marriage. Policies and governmental programs should meet the youth need to marry and make families. Understanding of marriage patterns changes and their social and economic implications need to be addressed. Successful implementation including right decisions and accurate schedules are needed to address and meet the requirements and needs of young people who want to marry or remain single [1]. The recommended solutions for improving marriage situation in Arab World are:

  • Using International pressure specially regarding woman rights stated in human rights conventions on Arab countries to follow the Women's Conventions.
  • Following poverty reduction strategies
  • Making the required reforms of marriage and family laws to meet the human rights standards and monitoring the impacts of these laws on Arab societies.
  • Providing safety employment opportunities for youth specially girls and women affected or at risk of early marriage.
  • Ensuring the right to education and information for girls, including married girls.
  • Providing incentives to encourage families to educate their children.
  • Encouraging activities that change the attitudes and behaviour of community and religious leaders – especially regarding early marriage, girls' education and employment.
  • Developing rules that redefine acceptable ages of marriage and offer social and economic supports that allow parents and girls to delay marriage until suitable age.
  • Raising consciousness about child marriage consequences and impacts of increase of average age of marriage as well.
  • Promoting legal, and chosen forms of marriage
  • Supporting married young girls

Work cited

  • Hoda R. and Magued, O,, " Marriage in the Arab World ", Population Reference Bureau, September 2005.
  • Stephen H. , "Early Marriage – Child Spouses ", Innocenti Digest no. 7, UNICEF , March 2007.
  • UNIFEM, "Forced and Early Marriage", "URL:https://www.stopvaw.org/Forced_and_Early_Marriage.htmlMinnesota", Advocates for Human Rights, August 2007.
  • Forum on Marriage and the Rights of Women and Girls, "Early Marriage and Poverty Exploring links for policy and program development" ,2003.
  • UNFPA, "The Promise of Inequality: Gender Inequality and Reproductive Health", "URL:https://www.unfpa.org/swp/2003/english/ch2/index.htm", 2005.
  • World Health Organization, “WHO/UNFPA/Population Council Technical Consultation on Married Adolescents” ,Geneva: WHO, 2003.
  • United Kingdom Foreign and Commonwealth Office, " A Choice by Right: Working Group on Forced Marriages Child Marriage Fact Sheet, 2000.
  • League of Arab States, Pan-Arab Project for Child Development: Arab Mother and Child Health Surveys , Pan-Arab Project for Family Health; Council of Health Ministers of GCC States, Gulf Family Health Surveys; ORC Macro, Demographic and Health Surveys; and Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics' special tabulations of 2004 Palestinian Demographic and Health Survey.
  • Social Research Center at the American University in Cairo using the Egypt Demographic and Health Survey (2003) and the Lebanon Maternal and Child Health Survey (1996).
  • Diane S. and Barbara I., “The Cost of Marriage in Egypt: A Hidden Variable in the New Arab Demography,” in the New Arab Family, Cairo Papers in Social Science 24 (2001): 80-116; and World Bank, “Building Institutions for Markets,” World Bank Report 2002 (Washington DC: World Bank, 2002): table 1.
  • Gihan S., “The Double Bind,” Al Ahram Weekly On-line 397 (Oct. 1-7, 1998).
  • The International Women's Tribune Centre Rights of Women, "A Guide to the Most Important United Nations Treaties on Women's Human Rights", New York 1998.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Free Arab Culture Essays and Papers Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Socio-political Essay Online for Free

Bertolt Brecht (1898-1956) was a German poet, playwright and theatre director. This project will look at the development of Brecht's playwriting over time in response to the socio-political changes in Berlin, by evaluating Brecht's work in the three periods of different political environments that Brecht was exposed to in Berlin. These should reveal how historical context and political stance shaped his work. Some reference will be made to the plays mentioned, due to their content and the different times in which they were written. Academic and contemporary responses mentioned in this project were mostly acquired at the Brecht Haus archive in Berlin on 14th February 2008. During the First World War, Brecht doubted in a school essay whether it was honourable to die for your nation and this feeling was heightened when he had to serve in the war as a medical orderly in 1918 (Rosenhaft, 1994). His first plays were written as the war ended; the working title of one of his first was Spartakus (later published as Drums of the Night), after the organisation of the German revolutionaries Luxemburg and Liebknecht. Brecht's radical side is clear in his early plays; he talks about the decay and corruption of the bourgeois society that he felt a part of (Meech, 1994). Yet arguably at this point in time, Brecht was “a bohemian rather than a Marxist” (Schoeps, 1992). The polarisation of the Weimar Republic and the rise of fascism that resulted in stronger political beliefs and works in the late 1920s (Fetscher, 1980). Saint Joan of the Stockyards, an allegory on the workings of the stock exchange, is an example of this (McCullough, 1994). The Weimar Republic saw the increasing commercialisation of leisure activity with the rise of popular entertainment (cinema, sports, dance, jazz, etc) (Rosenhaft, 1994). The educated, bourgeois audience was being replaced by a broader audience.

This cultural democratisation affected the role of the writer (Silberman, 1993). Some traditionalists sought new ways of asserting their elitism whilst others like Brecht began to develop a habit of production that submerged the author's subjectivity within a collective (Meech, 1994) as seen with the adaptations of Marlowe's Life of Edward the Second (1924) and Man Equals Man (1926). The notion of aesthetic activity as production rather than creation, theorised by Brecht in his essay The Threepenny Lawsuit (1932) indicates this shift. Social changes have therefore directly impacted Brecht's style of writing and theoretical concepts of theatre. Brecht was taught Marxism in the late 1920s twenties by Korsch and Benjamin, both anti-Stalinists (Esslin, 1959). Brecht supported the KPD, a mass party that to him seemed the only force capable of confronting Hitler, unlike the main Trotskyist organisation in Berlin with only 50 members (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). He would not have had much opportunity to influence events otherwise. Brecht's turn to Marxism changed his approach to theatre. He rejected the naturalistic style that presented the audience with a perfect illusion of reality. For productions of Drums of the Night, he suggested hanging a banner above the stage saying “Don't Stare So Romantically!” Ironically, the need for a new form of theatre became obvious to him after his biggest financial success.

The Threepenny Opera (1928) illustrated begging as an organised trade, with criminals working hand in glove with the police. But rather than shocking bourgeois audiences, the play was a huge success (Schmidt, 1992). Audiences loved music, while Brecht's critique of capitalism did not attract much attention. Brecht was involved in the conflicts at the end of the Weimar Republic. One month after the premiere of The Mother (1932), police ordered that the play could be recited but not played. The production of another play was stopped because Nazis were assaulting the actors (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). Brecht's vision of a more humane society changed with the rise of fascism (Silberman, 1993). He usually failed to represent convincingly the alternative order that could confront fascism, as seen in Fear and Misery of the Third Reich (1938), The Business Affairs of Mr. Julius Caesar (1938-39), and the Book of Changes (1935-42). As a Marxist, when the Nazis gained power, Brecht went into exile, staying close to the German border in Denmark and Finland to support the anti-fascist struggle until the war forced him to leave for the USA (1941). Until the end of WWII, Brecht's plays rarely reached the stage. Yet the plays written in exile are his most famous today.

Brecht expressed opposition to National Socialist and Fascist movements in Galileo, Mother Courage and Her Children, The Good Person of Szechwan, The Resistible Rise of Arturo Ui, and The Caucasian Chalk Circle. Mother Courage, for example, is torn between protecting her children from the war and making a profit out of the Thirty Years War (Leach, 1994). Key themes in the play include war as business, virtue in wartime and morality. None of those plays put simple answers to the moral questions they raise, and none of them are simple propaganda pieces. Rather, they show how the possibilities of the individual characters are limited by social conditions, and they force the viewer to think about the limits of “common sense” moral judgements (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). Brecht focused on new representation. On the one hand, the formal reductionism of the parable plays from this period seems to function as a kind of protective shield against the impossible contradictions of reality, but on the other, the shift in subject and technique to more deliberate forms of distancing de-centres the text-audience relation by transferring the utopian imagination into the spectators themselves (Silberman, 1993). The prologue to The Caucasian Chalk Circle (1944) suggests the political and poetic utopia Brecht envisioned in his mature plays. Brecht's invitation to return to the GDR, enticed by offer of own theatre and company, shows that although Brecht was not a member of the Communist Party, his allegiances were sincere (Esslin, 1959). The impressive Berliner Ensemble, visited on 15th February 2008, solely for the use of Brecht's work and directing, and his work still dominates the theatre today (fieldtrip, 2008).

He spent his last years defining and reworking his ideas. Although towards the end of his life Brecht wrote few plays, some famous poems have emerged from after the Second World War (Rundell, 1980). The Solution was Brecht's commentary on uprising (1953) the GDR; he supported government measures taken to crush the uprising, including the use of Soviet military force, despite his concern for the protesting people as well. His allegiance to the communist regime is portrayed in The Days of the Commune, which is based on the proletariat revolution of the Paris Commune in 1871, which attempted to bring about a revolution through the working class. Brecht is often criticised for returning to the GDR (Fetscher, 1980). In fact, exile gave Brecht first-hand experience of the ‘freedom' of the West. He was blacklisted - out of 40 scripts he wrote, one was accepted for filming, and this was cut severely by Hollywood that Brecht withdrew it. Brecht's commitments were leftist enough to provoke HUAC's investigation in 1947 and the refusal of visas for travel to West Germany under US control (Kruger, 2004). Brecht also came into conflict with the Stalinist cultural bureaucracy. They forced him to make changes in several productions and even stopped two of them (Esslin, 1959). Brecht received support for his theatre in East Germany but he expressed private reservations about SED policy, especially after the workers' uprising on 17 June 1953 challenged the party's claim to lead a “workers' and peasants' state” (Kruger, 2004). Brecht's relation to the GDR regime remained contradictory. On the one hand, he said it would be better to have a bad socialism than to have none, he also disliked the dictatorship. When the Berlin workers uprising (1953) was repressed, he wrote a letter to the general secretary of the Communist Party in which he called for dialogue (Esslin, 1959). Only his last sentence backing the government was published. Hi call for dialogue, I believe, had two aims. Firstly, to reinstate peace amongst the campaigning people, as it seems unlikely Brecht would have spoken publicly against the GDR regime, despite his dissatisfaction with the scenario.

Secondly, because of his pro-GDR regime status and his status as a GDR icon, his words would be more trusted by both parties. There is much argument over Brecht's true thoughts regarding the 1953 uprising. In private, Brecht was more outspoken. In his unpublished poem The Solution, he ironically asks, “If the people had forfeited the confidence of the government, would it not be easier to dissolve the people and elect another?” Brecht intended his theatre to be a critique of society, believing that theatre's function was to educate, and to achieve this he created his epic theatre theory. “A play should not cause the spectator to emotionally identify with the action before him or her, but should instead provoke rational self-reflection and a critical view of the actions on the stage”. Brecht wanted audiences to use critical perspective to identify social ills and therefore effect change, having described his plays as a collective political meeting in which the audience is to participate actively (Brooker, 1994). For this purpose, Brecht employed the use of techniques that remind spectators the play is a representation of reality and not reality itself called the alienation effect (Esslin, 1959). To achieve this, he ripped up the traditional five act structure of static drama. Inspired by Russian revolutionary theatre, he looked for ways to interrupt the main plot (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). For example, he used comments on the action directed to the audience, songs in between and projections of text with extra information. To undermine the natural curiosity of the audience, he used an announcer to summarise the scene before it was shown.

This allowed him to show that the course of events is not simply given, and therefore demands choices and active intervention. The political side of his plays became harder to ignore. A good example is The Mother, which is set during the Russian 1905 revolution, showing a mother who wants to free her Bolshevik son from jail - and how by doing so she gradually becomes convinced of Communism herself (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). Brecht chose historical settings as another means of creating a distance between the viewer and the play. In Galileo Galilei, the struggle between the scientist and the Catholic Church served as the scene for a debate on the tensions between individual beliefs and the way our rulers try to control our thoughts (Weber, 1980). Brecht's has attracted immense controversy since his early theatrical successes in the 1920s, having been compared to Shakespeare (Laughton); Brecht is considered one of the great playwrights and directors of the 20th century. Over 50 years after his death, his plays - along with those of Chekhov - are the most frequently performed works (Fuegi, 1995). As Brook has emphasised: “Brecht is the key figure of our time, and all theatre work today at some point starts or returns to his statements and achievement”. But much praise for his ability and work is usually held up because of his Marxist views. This political allegiance has annoyed some critics like Willet, who has chosen to look upon it as something unfortunate but incidental to his achievements. Bentley also expresses his disappointment: Brecht “would be a better writer if he gave up Marxism”. Others oppose his work on the grounds that it is propagandistic and lacks the subjective sentiments accessible only through a more personal theatre of individual experience. Inevitably, commentators are forced to approach Brecht by addressing not only his plays but also his writings on theatre as well as the way he directed productions. Mostly they decide to deal with his technical expertise in isolation from his politics (Fuegi, 1995).

Brecht is seen as a modern dramatist and poet worthy of careful study, and of no more particular interest except that he also happened to be political (Breuer 1992, Weber 1992). This purposeful attempt to neglect the political Brecht is frustrating because of its success in obscuring the relevance of his achievements, despite his surviving attempts by fascism to destroy its revolutionary content and undermine its significance. Most commentators have failed to understand the rationale of the method involved. But Brecht was quite clear about what he wanted and how he proposed to get it. When he referred to Marx as “the only audience for my plays that I had come across”, Brecht was describing a primary focus that is lost on his many critics. He did not mean that only Marxists could understand his plays. Rather it was Marxists alone who could understand what he was trying to do. Brecht comprehended how controlling cultural production had become under capitalism. His response was to do something about it by creating a theatre that sought to redefine the relationship between audience and performance (Trommler, 1980). Yet the historical illusions of modernism have become a problem of positioning oneself subjectively in a post-modern age when evaluating the subject of this study. Brecht was a communist without a party card. He could write only "on commission from the party," their precarious status did not hinder him from criticising the policies of the party as well as praising its goals (Volker, 1987).

His critiques were never simply blunt attacks, but were handled lightly with wit and satire. However, the party officials did not appreciate his critical irony, but preferred instead the sympathetic tracts of bourgeois authors. Brecht's communist allegiances have also led to numerous attempts by the mainstream art world to degrade his legacy - either by claiming that his plays are worthless Stalinist propaganda, or by claiming that they are worthwhile despite the politics (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). Yet Brecht's popularity has depended on misreading since 1928, when "The Ballad of Mack the Knife" song performed as part of The Threepenny Opera in Berlin became one of the most-recorded standards in the history of pop music. Brecht (and his composer Weill) might have wanted an art that hastens the overthrow of capitalism; instead they got covers from Darin and Sinatra (Tonkin, 2006). Depoliticising Brecht, however, is a difficult job - he wrote plays with titles such as The Seven Deadly Sins of the Petty Bourgeoisie and Days of the Commune, and poems like The Song of the Class Enemy (Windisch & Brandon, 2006). Brecht's period in exile was a fight against material want, persecution, betrayal, and political disappointment (Volker, 1987). The last years of his life were spent in the German Democratic Republic (GDR), because he wanted "another Germany" based on the principles of peace and socialism. There, he was able to preserve his independence and artistic integrity. He welcomed the politicisation of art while vigorously defending his work against any state ideology (Volker, 1987). His theatre, the Berliner Ensemble, was opposed to the official GDR doctrine on art (Socialist Realism) and to the German Stanislavski tradition (naturalism) (Etkind, 1980). On principle, he rejected the use of art and theatre to conform to state requirements of taste. Brecht's main contribution, then, is to be found in the innovative ways he devised for examining history and making the processes of history visible as changeable ones (Trommler, 1980). Brecht's impact is not to be found in any recipes he may have provided but rather in the possibility of his writings to enable our own creativity in thinking about historical truths and processes (Silberman, 1993).

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Socio-political Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Greek Debt Crisis Essay Online for Free

Introduction

This paper will examine the social welfare and economic implications of the recent 2015 referendum on Greek bailout conditions offered by the ECB and IMF, starting with and examination of the history behind the crisis, the resulting series of financial bailouts along with the conditions imposed and their economic and social welfare ramifications, and the potential irrelevancy of the recent 2015 referendum on the actual outcome of the negotiations.

The Background to the Greek Debt Crisis

The Greek debt crisis essentially started in late 2009, after economic reports about the Greek government's current deficit and debt levels made clear that the Greek government had deliberately under-reported their current deficit and financial situation in 2008 and 2009, with the deficit at the end of 2009 estimated independently at 12.5% of Greek GDP, twice the amount reported by official Greek governmental figures during that time (Simitis, 2014). These issues were further exacerbated by the revelation that Greek sovereign debt exceeded the 91.4% of Greek GDP previously reported, and actually stood at 126.8% of total Greek GDP due to a number of debts and liabilities within the Greek public sector that had been over-looked during the previous reports issued by the Greek Ministry of Finance (Simitis, 2014). These discrepancies in reporting raised serious concerns over Greece's ability to accurately report its current financial situation, and the resulting sovereign debt ratio of 128% of GDP raised serious questions over the government's ability to meet its current financial obligations (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014). The results of the revelations, occurring during the aftermath of the recent global financial crisis, led to a downgrading of Standard and Poor's credit rating of Greece to BB+, a rating which indicates a significant possibility of default on borrowing (Standard and Poor, 2015). This caused the interest rates of 5 year bonds issued by the Greek government to rise to 5.385% in November 2009, a figure 1.42% higher than the average rate of all other similar Euro-zone government bonds during that time (Simitis, 2014). This also occurred at a time where the Greek government was running a significant structural deficit, with governmental spending at 53.2% of GDP, and public revenue of only 37.8% (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014). In other words, only further borrowing would be able to sustain the current level of Greek public services, borrowing which had just became exponentially more expensive to maintain. Given the developing crisis in the Eurozone, the European Central Bank (ECB) chose to step in and offer assisted bailouts and loans using funds appropriated from other EU member states and the IMF (Baimbridge and Whyman, 2014). To this end, the Commission, the ECB and the IMF established the European Financial Stability Fund (EFSF, 2015). The EFSF issued a bailout loan of 110bn in 2010 to the Greek government, which came with the condition that tight austerity measures be put into place, including a number of cuts across a broad spectrum of public services and a series of tax increases to boost governmental revenue (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014). Similar conditions were given to other recipients of bailout loans from the EFSF, including Ireland and Portugal, who as of 2014 have successfully reduced their national debt levels and current account deficit to that specified by the bailout conditions (Baimbridge and Whyman, 2014). However, the Greek government was hit with a further recession in 2011, with GDP growth contracting by 9.6% in the 4th quarter of 2010, and then a further 10.4% fall in the 1st quarter of 2011 (World Bank, 2015). The continuing economic problems faced by Greece were due to a number of factors, including a severe fall in revenue from both tourism and shipping due to the global economic crisis, two of Greece's most important industries, and significant discrepancies between total taxes owed and total tax revenue, with total tax income in 2012 being 51.99bn, against the expected 110.79bn as reported by a State Audit Council report (Argitis and Nikolaidi, 2014). These conditions meant that Greece was unable to continue to meet its financial obligations in 2012 and again faced the possibility of sovereign debt default, requiring another bailout loan to be made by the EFSF of another 130bn, with additional conditions attached that required Greece to cut public spending by a total of 3.3bn by the end of the year, followed by further cuts of 10bn by the end of 2013, and again in 2014 (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014).

The Ramifications of the Imposed Bailout Conditions

The austerity measure conditions that were included as conditions on the two separate bailout loans to the Greek government were met with strong resistance from the Greek populace, and a number of anti-austerity demonstrations and riots occurred throughout the country in 2010, 2011 and 2012 (Simitis, 2014). The public reactions to the suggested austerity measures have been suggested to be responsible for the Greek government's delay in more fully and efficiently implementing the necessary austerity measures and tax collection reforms necessary to close the gap between public spending and revenue (IMF, 2014). Despite the social and economic issues resulting from the Greek populace's resistance to the bailout conditions, in 2014 the Greek economy appeared to be on the road to recovery, with improved economic performance and growth across the Eurozone driving recovery in both the tourism and shipping industries, and the achievement of a structural surplus, mainly due to a series of stringent cuts to governmental spending and public services, including the closure of the state-owned broadcasting company ERT (IMF, 2014). These improved economic conditions allowed Greece to once again issue government bonds on the private equities market since the initial bailout had been implemented, allowing the Greek government a much-needed source of finance to cover any future spending gaps, with Greek government-issued 5 year bonds being traded at interest rates of 4.95% in mid-April of 2014, at their lowest rates since the start of the 2009 debt crisis (IMF, 2014). An early parliamentary election was called in late 2014 after the current parliament was unable to vote in a new President for the 2015-2020 term with a parliamentary majority (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014). The Syriza party, which had been highly vocal in recent years about their lack of support for the austerity conditions imposed on Greece by the IMF and ECB, won a near majority and formed a coalition with a minority right-wing party in order to have the Syriza party leader Alexis Tsipras elected to the Presidential position. Upon gaining office, Mr Tsipras stated his refusal to respect the current bailout conditions imposed by the EFSF, with the intent of renegotiating more favourable terms (Ardagna and Caselli, 2014). The ECB and IMF responded by suspending any and all aid payments to Greece until either the existing deal was upheld or a new mutually-acceptable deal was agreed upon. The resulting uncertainty caused significant economic and social upheaval within the country; the Athens stock exchange experienced its worst loss in total value in the following week since the 2011 recession, while interest rates of Greek bonds rose sharply in the private market, eventually reaching a peak of 24.19% in early June, severely reducing the newly-established governmental ability to raise finance in the private equities market (Dellas and Tavlas, 2013). The resulting economic uncertainty caused a run on Greek banks, where customers were desperate to withdraw all their cash to protect against the risk of a banking industry collapse, which ironically severely increased the likelihood of such a collapse occurring (Mankiw and Taylor, 2014). In response to this socio-economic panic, the government issued a series of capital control measures that restricted the current opening hours of Greek banks while only allowing daily withdrawals of 60 from personal accounts either through the bank or ATM (The Economist, 2015a). The government also placed restrictions on foreign transactions and foreign currency trading, to prevent Greek investors from transferring their funds to a currently more stable currency. However, these measures only served to deepen the social welfare issues within the country, as the number of foreign imports dropped dramatically due to the restrictions placed on foreign transactions, including in a number of key areas such as medical equipment, medication, food and farming materials, leading to severe social welfare issues during the negotiation period (The Economist, 2015b).

The 2015 Referendum

After a series of negotiations with the ECB and IMF that failed to reach agreement on the conditions of a new deal, Mr Tsipras, the Greek President, called for a public referendum on the proposed conditions put forward by the ECB and IMF in the latest meetings of June 25th. The announcement was made on June 26th, with the referendum to be held on the 6th of July (The Economist, 2015c). This is an incredibly short length of time to ruminate on a complicated issue, one which could have profound effects for the social, political and economic future of one's country. The referendum paper itself also does not contain any details on the June 25th proposals, it merely asked whether the respondent is willing to accept them or not in a straightforward Yes or No ballot (The Economist, 2015c). Mr Tsipras, who campaigned for the No vote, listed those proposals during his campaign, including a controversial suggestion to raise taxes on tourism-related income that was later retracted by the ECB on June 26th, the day Mr Tsipras called the referendum (The Economist, 2015c). Despite the public excitement surrounding the referendum itself, it is clear that the referendum was a tool that would have failed to provide a welfare maximising outcome regardless of the result. As Arrow (1950) notes, it is impossible for a ranked-order voting system with three or more options to provide a welfare-maximising solution that satisfies three criteria of fairness; first, that each individual holds a set of ordinally-ranked preferences that do not change with the introduction of alternative options; that the final outcome should satisfy the majority of voters; and that no one individual has dictatorship power over the vote. While the referendum at first appears to be a ranked order voting system with only two options, which would negate the relevance of Arrow's Impossibility Theorem, the options themselves are not clearly defined. The majority No vote of 61.3% (BBC, 2015) merely rejected a specific set of conditions which were already irrelevant and out-dated at the time of the referendum. The results did not indicate whether those voters wish to accept different conditions, or to exit the Eurozone altogether, suggesting that there were more than two reasons for choosing one of the options that voters were inherently unable to express. Thus, those who voted No while expecting it to lead to a Greek exit from the Eurozone or a rejection of all further austerity measures would be ultimately disappointed. The referendum was also biased in terms of Arrow's (1950) fairness criteria in one major way; there was indeed one individual with dictatorship power over the vote itself. The referendum results were merely used to gather public opinion on an out-dated bailout condition offer; the results were not legally-binding, and in the event of a Yes vote Mr Tsipras would still be free to return to the negotiating table and attempt to renegotiate further with the ECB and IMF (The Economist, 2015c). The referendum was clearly used as a means for Mr Tsipras to gain leverage during negotiations in the case of a No vote, potentially to imply that Greek voters would support withdrawing from the Eurozone altogether if necessary, though as noted those voters would end up disappointed along with the rest who voted against further austerity measures, as despite the referendum results Mr Tsipras agreed to a further â86bn bailout from the EFSF on the 14th of August, with 4 main conditions to the deal: a structural surplus of 3.5% of GDP to be met by 2018; a series of pension system reforms intended to cut public sector pension spending ( a condition with serious social welfare implications for the elderly and retired); reforms to labour and product markets to increase competitiveness; and a series of banking sector reforms intended to recapitalise the private banking sector (Wearden and Fletcher, 2015).

Conclusion

The 2015 Greek Referendum bailout conditions referendum was never capable of offering a welfare-maximising solution for voters; in fact, it barely offered any social, political or economic solution at all. Voters rejected a set of conditions that had already been altered at the time of the referendum, and were subsequently presented with a new bailout deal containing further harsh austerity measures such as cuts to public pension funding. It is doubtful whether the results of the referendum actually offered Mr Tsipras additional leverage in subsequent negotiations, but it is clear the Referendum results had little impact beyond this meagre measure

References

  • Ardagna, S and Caselli, F (2014), 'The Political Economy of the Greek Debt Crisis: A Tale of Two Bailouts', American Economic Journal: Macroeconomics, Volume 6, Issue 4, pp291-323
  • Argitis, G and Nikolaidi, M (2014), 'The Financial Fragility and the Crisis of the Greek Government Sector', International Review of Applied Economics, Volume 28, Issue 3, pp273-291
  • Arrow, K (1950), 'A Difficulty in the Concept of Social Welfare', Journal of Political Economy, Volume 58, Issue 4, pp328-346
  • Baimbridge, M and Whyman, P (2014), Crisis in the Eurozone: Causes, Dilemmas and Solutions, 1st Ed, London: Palgrave-MacMillan
  • BBC (2015), Greece debt crisis: Greek voters reject bailout offer [Online], Available; https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-europe-33403665
  • Dellas, H and Tavlas, G (2013), 'The gold standard, the euro, and the origins of the Greek sovereign debt crisis', CATO Journal, Volume 33, Issue 3, pp491-520
  • Economist, The (2015a), How Capital Controls Work [Online], Available; https://www.economist.com/node/21656439
  • Economist, The (2015b), Greece's Economy Under Banking Controls: When Banks Die [Online], Available; https://www.economist.com/node/21657000
  • Economist, The (2015c), How Greece's referendum works [Online], Available; https://www.economist.com/blogs/economist-explains/2015/07/economist-explains-2
  • EFSF (2015), About EFSF [Online], Available; https://www.efsf.europa.eu/about/index.htm
  • IMF (2014), IMF Country Report No. 14/151: Greece, New York: International Monetary Fund
  • Mankiw, G and Taylor, M (2014), Macroeconomics, 2nd Ed, London: W H Freeman
  • Simitis, C (2014), The European Debt Crisis: The Greek Case, 1st Ed, Manchester: Manchester University Press
  • Standard and Poor (2015), Ratings Criteria [Online], Available; https://www.standardandpoors.com/en_EU/web/guest/ratings/ratings-criteria/-/articles/criteria/governments/filter/all
  • Wearden, G and Fletcher, N (2015), Eurozone finance ministers agree to third Greek bailout - as it happened [Online], Available; https://www.theguardian.com/business/live/2015/aug/14/greek-bailout-vote-and-eurozone-gdp-growth-figures-live-updates#block-55ce5ef8e4b076bafa06f640
  • World Bank (2015), World Development Indicators: Greece [Online], Available; https://data.worldbank.org/country/greece
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Greek Debt Crisis Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Difference between Monetary and Fiscal Policy Essay Example Pdf

Describe the difference between monetary and fiscal policy in the UK and explain how such policies can be used to achieve different macroeconomic government objectives.

The main and most obvious difference between monetary and fiscal policy is that monetary policy is set by the central bank and fiscal policy is implemented by the government. In the case of the UK, monetary policy is decided upon by the Bank of England which since 1997 has been independent from the government. It would be worth considering the two types of economic policy in more detail now before turning to look at how they can be used to help meet macroeconomic government objectives. Monetary policy is the attempt to control macroeconomic variables through the setting of interest rates. It is a rather blunt policy tool as its effects can be felt throughout the economy as a whole. By changing interest rates, the Bank of England is trying to influence the overall expenditure in the economy as well as controlling inflation. Reducing interest rates makes borrowing the more attractive alternative to saving which then leads to more spending in the economy. Lowering interest rates can also make assets such as property increase in value which also leads to more spending as homeowners extend mortgages and consume more. By cutting interest rates, it is hoped that this increased spending feeds through to output and then to employment.

Increasing interest rates on the other hand, has the opposite effect by making saving more attractive than spending and therefore overall spending in the economy is reduced. Fiscal policy is controlled by central government. It can be defined as, “a government’s program with respect to (1) the purchase of goods and services and spending on transfer payments, and (2) the amount and type of tax” (Samuelson and Nordhaus, 1998). It involved the government changing levels of taxation and spending in order to influence the level of aggregate demand (AD). The purpose of fiscal policy is to reduce inflation, stimulate economic growth and to stabilise this growth and avoid periods of ‘boom and bust’ which characterised the economy during the 1980s and early 1990s. If monetary policy is described as a blunt instrument then fiscal policy is a precision tool that can target particular sectors of the economy and population in order to achieve the desired economic changes. Both these different types of policy are working towards achieving different macroeconomic objectives. It would be worth looking at these in greater detail now. There are four major macroeconomic objectives that any economic policy should be working to achieve. These are full employment; price stability; sustainable economic growth and; keeping the Balance of Payments in equilibrium. These four different objectives compete with each other and all achieve different levels of importance depending on the priorities of the government. During the 1960s, the Balance of Payments took centre stage. This was before the global economy made operating with a deficit a viable and sustainable option.

Nowadays most governments operate with a budget deficit and the balance of Payments is no longer seen as a top priority for the government. In 2007/2008 the UK government showed a deficit of £38.7 billion which is around 2.7% of gross domestic product (GDP). The general government debt is around £614.4 billion which is around 43.2% of GDP (ONS, 2008). In the 1960s such levels of debt would be unthinkable but now they are just part of a global reality. In order to implement social programs and fulfil spending promises, the government is forced to borrow from global institutions. This has become a global reality.

These current times of economic uncertainty only increases the amount of borrowing by governments all over the world. Full employment enjoyed similar prominence in the period after the war until the 1980s. Full employment meant that more people were contributing to the economy both in terms of output and through taxation. It also meant that the government had to spend less on social programs. This full employment was aided by a largely industrial economy which started to decline in the 1980s. Thatcher wanted to restructure the economy to make it more efficient and move it away from its industrial base. Full employment is still an important objective and it is one that is gaining prevalence again but during this current recession it isn’t a realistic prospect. The current rate of employment stands at 74.1% (ONS, 2009) which is a slight decrease on the previous year.

However, as the recession deepens, it is expected that this number will fall even further. Perhaps the most two important objectives for the government at present are sustained economic growth and price stability by keeping inflation low. The government is trying to foster sustainable growth in the economy which means growth without inflation. However, the past year has seen the UK economy slip in to a recession, making any sort of growth impossible. During this recession the level of inflation has fallen but this has not translated into economic growth. It was hoped that that low inflation would mean that spending would increase. However, the current economic climate has seen prices fall so much that consumers are now waiting to see if prices fall even further before spending (Monaghan, 2009). This essay will now turn to look at how the use of monetary and fiscal policy can be used to achieve these macroeconomic objectives. Perhaps one of the most significant changes that the current government introduced was giving the Bank of England independence when it comes to setting interest rates.

Before the government was dictating both monetary policy and fiscal policy. The Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) is now tasked with maintaining price stability and also supporting the government in meeting its objectives for growth and employment (Budd, 1998). The government still sets the goals of monetary policy but it is up to the Bank of England to decide how best to achieve this through. The independence of the central bank is considered important for a number of reasons. Firstly, politicians are not experts when it comes to monetary policymaking.

Secondly, central banks are more likely to have the interest of the country at heart rather than politicians who may be motivated by implementing populist policies for the sake of winning votes. Thirdly, politicians are unlikely to want to keep to monetary policies when they have adverse affects like high unemployment, although this wasn’t the case with Thatcher. The final argument for having an independent central bank is that countries that have them tend to have lower levels of inflation (Alensina and Gatti, 1995). This essay will now look at how the MPC goes about meeting it’s objective of maintaining price stability. The present recession has forced the committee to consider radical solutions to the unique problems that the economy is facing. For the past year, the bank has cut interest rates on six consecutive occasions to the current record low of 0.5%. It was hoped that cutting interest rates to this level would stimulate spending in the economy and that this would translate to economic growth and would keep inflation at the.

However, this has not happened because the banks have stopped lending the money usually required to facilitate the spending. This has forced the Bank of England to consider other options.

One such measure introduced in the past month was quantitative easing. This idea is the equivalent of printing up large amounts of money, in the case of the UK it is estimated to be about £75 billion, and throwing it out of a helicopter so that the people below could pick it up and spend it (Elliot, 2009). This is a rather simplistic view of what the Bank of England is trying to achieve. This £75 billion will be used to buy government bonds and corporate debt over the next three months. By exchanging these bonds for cash that the bank has printed, it is hoped that this will increase the flow of money in the economy. With more cash, banks should start lending once again to other banks, businesses, and customers. This will increase spending in the economy which will lead to economic growth.

However, the success of this measure rests on whether customers still want to borrow. The popular conception amongst the public is that we are in this position because we borrowed way above our means. It remains to be seen if once credit is made available again by banks whether people will take it up again. If they don’t, then the banks will be awash with money that will be doing nothing and this will not lead to economic growth but rather to inflation. The Bank of England has to achieve a fine balance. It has to provide enough money to banks to encourage them to lend again at competitive rates but it also has to make sure that there isn’t a surplus of money that will send inflation out of control (Kollewe, 2009). Beyond cutting interest rates and printing there is little more that monetary policy can offer to delivering macroeconomic objectives. This essay will now look at how fiscal policy delivers macroeconomic objectives. Fiscal policy can be more fine tuned to target particular sectors of the economy and the population. It does not take the rather blanket approach taken by monetary policy. Perhaps the most effective fiscal policy to achieving macroeconomic objectives is through borrowing and taxation.

For example, the government recently cut the lower starting rate of income tax. This encourages people on lower incomes to work more hours because they will be able to keep more of what they earn. This they can either spend or save, based on the level of inflation that is determined by monetary policy. Another measure introduced last year by the government was the 2.5% reduction of the rate of VAT. This was introduced at the end of last year as a way of boosting spending, especially in the run up to the busy Christmas period. However, this has not had the desired effect on household spending which is at it’s lowest level since 1991 (ONS, 2009). It could be argued that fiscal policy is not as much use as monetary policy to meeting macroeconomic objectives at the present time.

The government is trying to stimulate spending in the economy by borrowing more money in order to fund tax cuts and increased spending in social programs. However, the effect of this may be that people are realising that they may face a higher tax burden in the future because of this increased spending and so are saving more in anticipation of this. The government is presently pumping money into sectors of the economy that provide large numbers of jobs. For example, it has just stated that it is prepared to make up to £2.3 billion available to car manufacturers. The Business Minister, Ian Pearson, stated that this level of investment was necessary to, “ensuring the industry comes out of the current downturn with the skills and technology needed to be competitive in the global automotive market”. However, the success of this initiative again rests with the consumer. Will they want to borrow to finance things such as cars in the future? The car industry may be facing a downturn that will not recover after the recession. Because the economy is at present shrinking it means that the government is not getting as much income from tax revenues because less people are in work and those working aren’t getting as much.

Welfare spending has had to increase to make sure that the standard of living does not fall in the UK. Those who have lost their jobs as a result of the recession have to be provided for by the state. All of this contributes to a much larger deficit which doesn’t fit in with meeting macroeconomic objectives. With the global economic situation seemingly changing on an almost daily basis, it is hard to judge just how effective monetary and fiscal policies are in meeting macroeconomic objectives. It is also hard to judge which is the most effective way of delivering these objectives.

This essay would argue that both policies are fairly weak at the moment. In order for monetary policy to work, it requires people to have the confidence to spend knowing that money is always going to be available to them. This could be just a person buying goods in the high street or a business buying services from another business. It would seem that UK consumers are willing to hold on to large quantities of money, even though the central bank has lowered interest rates to such an extent that it makes saving a very unattractive option. Consumer confidence is low, and when it is low people tend to hold on to their money rather than borrowing more. It remains to see just how effective this quantitative easing will be. In many ways it seems that fiscal policy is working against monetary policy at present in achieving macroeconomic objectives. While on the surface it seems logical for the government to be borrowing big in order to fund tax cuts and create jobs, many people see this borrowing as storing up problems for the future because all this borrowed money will have to be repaid at some point.

This means that people are saving more instead of spending which the government wants us to do to meet the objective of growth in the economy. In a growing, sustainable economy, both monetary and fiscal policy should serve to benefit each other and they should work for each other in achieving macroeconomic objectives. In a receding economy such as is being witnessed in the UK, there needs to be a delicate balance struck between the two. It would seem that this balance has yet to be achieved and at present they are fighting against each other.

Bibliography and References:

  • Alensina, A. and Gatti, R. (1995). How independent should central banks be?, The American Economic Review, 85(2), 196-200.
  • Budd, A. (1998). The Role and Operations of the Bank of England Monetary Policy Committee, The Economic Journal, 108(451), 1783-1794.
  • Dunkley, J. (2009). UK given approval for £2.3bn auto bail-out, The Telegraph, 28 Feb.
  • Elliot, L. (2009). Quantitative Easing, The Guardian, 8 January.
  • Monaghan, A. (2009). UK inflation falls to lowest in lowest in almost 50 years, The Telegraph, 17 Feb.
  • Kollewe, J. (2009). Bank of England cuts rates to 0.5% and starts quantitative easing, The Guardian, 5 March.
  • Moore, E. and Warwick-Ching, L. (2009). Rate cut brings more misery to savers, The Financial Times, 5 March.
  • Office for National Statistics (ONS) (2008). UK Government Debt and Deficit [online] Available from: https://www.statistics.gov.uk/cci/nugget.asp?ID=277 [Date accessed: 10 March 2009]
  • Office for National Statistics (ONS) (2009). Employment [online] Available from: https://www.statistics.gov.uk/cci/nugget.asp?ID=12 [Date accessed: 10 March 2009]
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Difference between monetary and fiscal policy Essay Example Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Entrepreneurs Essay Download Pdf

Introduction

As economies continue to integrate due to globalisation and formally closed economies like India and China march toward total liberalisation, entrepreneurship is on the increase. A close analysis of developed and industrialised economies indicates a common denominator that stands out amongst all of them. This is the most important role played by entrepreneurship and entrepreneurs in such economies. This phenomenon has proved to us that if an economy is to develop fully, entrepreneurship should be allowed to flourish. Therefore it is the objective of this paper to critically analyse the impact of entrepreneurs in any given economy. In this paper the writer will identify and discuss the many benefits afforded to an economy through entrepreneurs and entrepreneurship and the disadvantages of the same and draw conclusions on the overall impact of the entrepreneurs.

Innovation

Individuals often resort to entrepreneurship for one of the following reasons; they find a market niche and have the solution to profit from such niche; they have been unable to find suitable employment or a suitable means of income and therefore have resorted to using their creativity to generate an income for themselves; or they have the technological know-how and the financial resources (or able to source all of the above) necessary to generate income by satisfying a need in the marketplace. Irrespective of which of the above led an individual to become an entrepreneur it is clear that innovation and creativity is the driving factor and therefore, it can be stated that the biggest impact of entrepreneurs to an economy is the innovative contribution that they make.

Job Creation

As stated in the previous section, one of the main reasons that individuals tend to become entrepreneurs is because they are unable to find suitable jobs. As a result, by being enterprising, creative and finding a market niche, not only are they able to generate an income for themselves but also to employ other individuals in their business operations. Therefore, one of the most positive impacts that entrepreneurs make on an economy is job creation and the reduction of unemployment levels. In developed countries we see that almost 40 – 50% of the workforce are employed in small and medium scale business enterprises that were started up by very enterprising individuals. Likewise in countries like India, we see that millions of women have been able to pull their families out of poverty through self-employment and entrepreneurship that has been made possible by different Non-Governmental Organisations and due to the availability of such resources through micro finance etc. Africa is another good example of small scale entrepreneurs helping to reduce poverty and helping many to avoid destitution. Therefore based on everything that has been stated above it is apparent that entrepreneurs can cause a great degree of impact on an economy through job creation and income generation.

Increased Competition

Another positive impact of entrepreneurship on an economy is the increasing level of competition as new entrepreneurs join the fray in existing domestic markets. While one may venture to say that this will only lead to market saturation, the upside of such a phenomenon is that it causes all the players in the market to re-evaluate their operational capabilities, increase value addition, lower costs and become more efficient. Thus it can be stated that competition reduces the likelihood of monopolies and oligopolies in the marketplace and is beneficial to the customer and the economy as a whole.

Increased Productivity

One of the advantages of increased competition in an economy is that individuals and firms continue to source methods that can better improve their operations, use resources more efficiently and most importantly reduce costs while adding value. All this often results in an increase in productivity in an economy and an increase in the gross domestic product (GDP), which is indeed a benefit for the economy. While opponents tend to state that when productivity increases the unemployment can often increase, thus reducing the positive impacts, it is the opinion of the writer that increased productivity leading to increased unemployment will then cause more individuals to be creative, find niche markets, become entrepreneurs and begin generating more employment opportunities, thus re-inventing the wheel and driving the economy forward.

New Markets

As stated in the previous section increased competition in the marketplace can cause saturation and as a result many entrepreneurs maybe driven to seek new markets for their products and services or adapt market penetration tactics. Either way such a phenomena of increased competition, which ultimately causes individuals to look for new markets, can be considered as a positive impact on the economy. Therefore, entrepreneurs can be considered to play a very important role in the economy. As integration of economies continues due to globalisation, entrepreneurs often tend to look for markets that are outside of their domestic sphere thus generating foreign revenue and increasing the prosperity of the economy as a whole. While this may be a very simplistic explanation of the impact that entrepreneurs make on an economy, it is also safe to say that the employment generation, increased competition, market expansion, market penetration and sourcing new markets all result in income generation that ultimately help an economy to become more prosperous, drawing millions out of poverty and generating funds for social welfare activities that ultimately uplift the living standards of its citizenry.

Negative Impacts of Entrepreneurs

The single largest negative impact of entrepreneurs on an economy is the plundering of resources, which can have a disastrous effect on the environment. While such negative impacts are mitigated to some extent in developed economies due to the enforcement of environmental protection standards and regulations, this is not the case in developing economies. Further entrepreneurship requires a certain degree of business knowledge and know how, without which entrepreneurial ventures can often fail, which can also cause many financial hardship that in extreme cases can even lead to destitution.

Social Entrepreneurship

Today we see the realm of social entrepreneurship growing exponentially which is a very positive sign and has helped to draw millions out of poverty, decrease unemployment, decrease the number of people dependent on social welfare and all in all uplift the living standards and quality of life of millions. Further social entrepreneurship initiatives are also often seen as ‘green initiatives' that take into consideration the impact on the natural environment and therefore strives to keep this at a minimum. This increases awareness about such issues, avoids the plundering of natural resources and conserving the environment wherever possible. Therefore, it can be stated that the negative impacts of entrepreneurs on an economy can be mitigated to some extent through social entrepreneurship.

Conclusion

Based on everything that has been discussed above it is apparent that the positive impacts of entrepreneurs on an economy, far outweigh the negative impacts. Job creation, reduction in unemployment levels, increased competition, opening new markets, increasing productivity, foreign income generation and poverty alleviation are some of the positive impacts that entrepreneurs have on an economy. However, this is not to say that there are no negative impacts such as the wastage and plundering of resources, yet taken as a whole it is apparent that the entrepreneurs positively impact an economy.

Bibliography

  • Assudani, R. H. (2009). ‘Ethnic Entrepreneurship: The Distinct Role of Ties'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 22(2), pp. 197 - 206.
  • Boissin, J., Branchet, B., Emin, S., & Herbert, J. I. (2009). ‘Students and Entrepreneurship: A Comparative Study of France and the United States'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 22(2), pp. 101 – 105.
  • Butler, J. S. & Kozmetsky, G. (Eds.). (2004). Immigrant and Minority Entrepreneurship: The Continuous Rebirth of American Communities. Westport, CT: Praeger.
  • Dheeriya, P. L. (2009). ‘A Conceptual Framework for Describing Online Entrepreneurship'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 22(3), pp. 275 - 281.
  • Frith, K., & Mcelwee, G. (2009). ‘Value-Adding and Value-Extracting Entrepreneurship at the Margins'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 22(1), pp. 39 - 41.
  • Harman, J. (2008, February). ‘Successful Social Entrepreneurship: the Case of the Eaglehawk Recycle Shop'. Journal of Services Research pp. 201 - 203.
  • Harper, D. A. (2003). Foundations of Entrepreneurship and Economic Development. New York: Routledge.
  • Hart, D. M. (Ed.). (2003). The Emergence of Entrepreneurship Policy: Governance, Start-Up, and Growth in the U.S. Knowledge Economy. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
  • Light, P. C. (2009, Summer). ‘Social Entrepreneurship Revisited'. Stanford Social Innovation Review, 7, pp. 21 - 23.
  • Menkhoff, T. & Gerke, S. (Eds.). (2002). Chinese Entrepreneurship and Asian Business Networks. London: RoutledgeCurzon.
  • Nicholls, A. (Ed.). (2006). Social Entrepreneurship: New Models of Sustainable Social Change. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Parnell, J. A., & Lester, D. L. (2007). ‘Reevaluating the Entrepreneurship-management Conundrum: Challenges and Solutions'. Journal of Applied Management and Entrepreneurship, 12(4), pp. 74 - 77.
  • Wasilczuk, J., & Zieba, K. (2008). ‘Female Entrepreneurship in Transitional Economies: The Case of Poland'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 21(2), pp. 153 - 155.
  • Welsch, H. P. (Ed.). (2003). Entrepreneurship: The Way Ahead. New York: Routledge.
  • Williams, C. C. (2009). ‘Beyond Legitimate Entrepreneurship: The Prevalence of Off-the-Books Entrepreneurs in Ukraine'. Journal of Small Business and Entrepreneurship, 22(1), pp. 55 - 61.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Entrepreneurs Essay Download Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Social Media Essay Example Pdf

Discuss Barthes' essay with reference to social media

In his seminal essay 'The Death of the Author', Barthes (1977) challenged the world of orthodox literary criticism by claiming that its obsession with distilling the truth of an author's intentions from his works is futile. The act of writing is 'the destruction of every voice, of every point of origin' (Barthes, 1977, p. 142). The author's aims and motives are obscured by the duplicity of language: not only is language inadequate to express the author's inner world, but language also skews the reader's interpretation of the work. Language is a complex network of cultural codes and associations over which the author has no control. Yet, the notion of authorship is not confined to literature. In this essay, I shall be examining how Barthes' ideas apply to Facebook, a social media website. Here, users create Facebook 'pages', which are in effect mini-autobiographies that they update with news, photos, biographical details etc. Users are also able to make 'friends', i.e. to subscribe for updates from other users' pages, and to comment on these updates. Facebook is then a vast network of individuals who are both authors of their own pages and readers cum critics of their friends' pages. Moreover, not only is communication between author and reader mediated via language, it is also restricted by the Facebook software, which as shall be seen, permits only certain kinds of expression on the part of the author. This essay is structured as follows. Firstly, I will review Barthes' essay in more depth, emphasizing the issues relevant to my study. Secondly, I will consider how Facebook mediates between author and reader, providing a cultural template through which an individual's biography is filtered. Finally, I will consider how Facebook alienates users in the manner envisaged by Barthes in his essay. According to Barthes, it is the identity of the author that is paramount for the literary critic: the work is 'tyrannically centred on the author, his person, his life, his tastes, his passions' (Barthes, 1977, p. 143). The responsibility for meaning, for the "truth" of the work, as well as its success or failure, is placed squarely on the author's shoulders. The work of literary criticism is to enlighten the readership as to the author's motives by invoking their personal biography: Van Gogh's genius is attributed to his madness, Tchaikovsky's to his alcoholism and Baudelaire's to his 'failure' (ib.) as a man. Yet, Barthes maintained that the medium of language interferes with the process of writing, such that an author necessarily relinquishes control over the manner in which his work is interpreted. Influenced by contemporary advances in linguistics, Barthes claimed that 'language knows a "subject" not a "person"' (Barthes, 1977, p. 145). The "subject", or author, of the work is not an individual. In other words, the author as individual with a biography, emotions and intentions is invisible to the reader. Rather, they see the subject, an empty construct, an abstraction formed by the words on the page. This subject is 'empty outside the enunciation which defines it' (ib.): it is the work that calls the subject into being and the subject is entirely dependent on the work. The author's true identity has been hollowed out due to the alienating effects of language and has been replaced by the subject, a mere place-marker holding language together. Language, argues Barthes, has this alienating effect since a text is nothing more than a 'tissue of quotations drawn from the innumerable centres of culture' (Barthes, 1977, p. 146). An author's words, and the manner in which he utilizes them, are not the author's own but are drawn from a huge cultural reservoir of previous texts. A phrase elicits a culturally determined meaning, provoking a myriad of contextual associations giving the text a life of its own, constantly displacing its meaning even further from the author's intentions. Attempting to pin down meaning is futile since no text was ever written in a vacuum; the cultural landscape has no origin, no founding text that would guarantee all meaning. Rather, the origin is language itself, which 'ceaselessly calls into question all origins' (Barthes, 1977, p. 146). The author is then doubly deceived by language. Firstly, language does not belong to the author. It is an alien presence that inhabits him and that enforces a culturally dependent mode of expression. The author can never perfectly capture his inner experience through language, as there is always some part of that experience that evades capture through words. Rather, he evokes the subject, his avatar, as seen through the lens of language. The author's true identity, if indeed there is a "truth" of his existence, will always elude the reader and in fact, himself. Secondly, the reader also has this alienating relationship with language. The "meaning" of a text, as supposed by the reader, is coloured by their cultural context. The author, in allowing his work to be read, relinquishes control over how it is received by his audience. They will draw their own conclusions, make their own associations and interpretations which depend on the 'immense dictionary' (Barthes, 1977, p. 147) of cultural references that they have at their disposal. Thus, the reader imagines the author as a subject, a construct of their own conception of language. This subject differs not only from reader to reader, but temporally, being reconstructed every time a particular reader approaches the same text. Any attempt to attribute a work's success or failure to a particular author is fruitless. When a critic examines and re-examines a text, they are merely reconstructing their own conception of the author as subject, which can never coincide with the author's conception, let alone his true identity. Asking an author to explain a text merely creates another text with another subject, and the game begins again. The author is effectively powerless—responsibility for a text's interpretation is passed to the reader. There is no ultimate meaning: 'In the multiplicity of writing everything is to be disentangled, nothing deciphered' (Barthes, 1977, p. 148). Yet the effects of language are not disproportionately visited upon the author. According to Barthes, language's alienating effects apply equally to the reader. The reader is 'without history, biography, psychology' (Barthes, 1977, p. 148), an impersonal 'destination' (ib.) for the author's work. The reader's role is to hold the text together, to create a unity from the cultural codes that make up the text. In other words, the author's relationship with the reader cannot be personal: they can make no assumptions about the reader's identity because the reader, in the process of reading, is also an abstraction evoked by the text. By symmetry, both author and reader, as represented by the text, are subjects. Barthes' textual examples in 'Death of the Author' (1977) are not limited to literary texts: as mentioned previously he uses the music of Tchaikovsky and the work of Van Gogh as illustrations of his thesis. Indeed, Barthes never limited his analysis to so-called high culture: in his book 'Mythologies' (Barthes, 1972) he deconstructs the cultural meanings of, for example, advertisements and films. Facebook is therefore an entirely appropriate medium for a Barthesian analysis. First, however, I will examine what is meant by a text in Facebook, and nature of the cultural codes peculiar to it. Facebook can be viewed as a form of relational biography (Richardson & Hessey, 2009). Users update their biographies by adding essentially static information (date of birth, education etc.) as well as time-dependent data about their feelings, social commitments etc. This data can be annotated by other users in the form of comments. The user in essence constructs a "timeline" which amounts to a somewhat haphazard diary of their inner life and social relations. This timeline can be read by the user and, within certain restrictions, the user's friends. It therefore amounts to a text, from which an interpretation of the author-as-subject is constructed in the reader's mind. Facebook updates can take written form, which is subject to the constraints of language and alienating to both author and reader as demonstrated earlier. Yet, the architecture of Facebook is such that further restrictions are imposed on the author. One example of this is the "like" button. A user demonstrates his or her preferences by "liking" other users' comments or updates. Yet, this restricts the user's reaction to mere approval. This has led some users to call for a "dislike" button, or a range of options to indicate, for example, humour or sadness (Guynn, 2015) in response to an update. Such an innovation would, however, still place a limit on the user's reaction. Facebook texts are therefore subject to a far more restrictive cultural template than literary texts. The Facebook user-author is potentially alienated as a subject to a greater extent than the author of a literary text. However, such alienation appears to be exactly what users of Facebook want. Das and Kramer (2013) note that a large proportion of users (over 70%) practice self-censorship. That is, they manipulate both the data they post to Facebook and their reactions to other user's activities, in an attempt to create an idealized autobiography. They might attempt to post only positive updates in order to seem optimistic, or they might "like" other user's posts in order to appear friendly. In Barthesian terms, they are manipulating the "language" of Facebook in an attempt to manifest themselves as an ideal subject. The Facebook author is not only dead, but the cause of death appears to be suicide. Unfortunately, as Barthes predicts, such an exercise is futile. The restrictive cultural code inscribed in the apparatus of Facebook leads to far greater opportunity for the reader to misunderstand the user-author. Such misunderstandings can lead to "flame wars"—heated comment exchanges between users—or in extreme cases "unfriending" (the revoking of the right of another user to read one's Facebook page). This had led to the publication of numerous books on Facebook etiquette that document the possible ways in which such misunderstandings occur and provide tips on how to avoid these situations (see e.g. Awl (2011)). However, such rules of etiquette serve only to narrow the options a user has for self-expression, leading to further alienation. These cases serve to illustrate Barthes' claim that the reader is 'without history, biography, psychology' (Barthes, 1977, p. 148), an abstract concept emptied of intention and affect. When a user-author makes an update on Facebook, they make certain assumptions about the reader and how they will react, and tailor the update to such a reader. Yet, these assumptions are not necessarily transmitted to the readership, each of whom infers their own reader-subject from the text. An example is the relationship status: a user can define themselves as "single", "married", in a "complicated" relationship etc., and a complex etiquette has arisen to prevent misunderstandings of this status (Suddath, 2009). For example, the author might set their relationship status to "complicated" and assume readers will interpret this as "difficult" and view it fairly neutrally. However, the author's partner might interpret it in an entirely different fashion—as an open relationship, perhaps—and have a negative reaction. The author and their partner each invest the reader of the text with a different identity: the reader-subject of the text is an abstract concept, given flesh by the individual reactions of the text's consumers. In conclusion, I have examined the phenomenon of Facebook from the perspective of Barthes' essay, 'The Death of the Author' (1977). I have argued, not only that the Facebook author is dead in the sense that their identity cannot be inferred from their text, but that Facebook architecture and the self-censorship of its participants lead to a greater alienation of the author from their text than that achieved in a purely literary context. Moreover, I have demonstrated that this alienation applies both to the author and the reader of the text. Not only is the censorship practised by user-authors with the aim of creating an idealized self-image counterproductive, but the message the user-readers receive about their identity is equally alienating. Since Facebook authors are at the same time readers, this leads to a double alienation that Barthes had not anticipated when he wrote his essay.

Bibliography

Awl, D. (2011). Facebook Me! A Guide to Socializing, Sharing, and Promoting on Facebook. Berkeley, CA: Peachpit Press. Barry, D. (2012). How To Facebook - The No Nonsense Guide To Using Facebook. UK: KernowWeb. Barthes, R. (1972). Mythologies. New York: The Noonday Press. Barthes, R. (1977). The Death of the Author. In R. Barthes, Image, Music, Text (pp. 142-148). London: Fontana Press. Das, S., & Kramer, A. (2013). Self-Censorship on Facebook. San Diego: Association for the Advancement of Artificial Intelligence. Guynn, J. (2015). USA Today. Retrieved October 19, 2015, from https://www.usatoday.com/story/tech/2015/10/08/facebook-reactions-emotions-like-button-dislike/73574704/ Richardson, K., & Hessey, S. (2009). Archiving the self? Facebook as biography of social and relational memory. Journal of Information, Communication and Ethics in Society, 7(1), 25-38. Suddath, C. (2009). Your Facebook Relationship Status: It's Complicated. Retrieved October 19, 2015, from Time: https://content.time.com/time/business/article/0,8599,1895694,00.html
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Social Media Essay Example Pdf. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Rugby World Cup 2015 Essay Example for College Students

Introduction

Despite widespread publication of a positive economic impact resulting from the Rugby World Cup in 2015, issues such as overspending, forecasting accuracy, and the focus of the reporting itself, suggests there are also factors which may materially reduce the overall impact. Because of this, it is possible the widely publicised outlook for this event is overly optimistic. This report will critically analyse the direct, indirect and induced economic impact of the Rugby World Cup 2015 for England. Beginning with a summary of the economic impact, issues will then be examined with reference to the stated impacts, relevant literature, and comparable events around the world such as previous Rugby World Cups. The analysis concludes that the economic impact of the 2015 Rugby World Cup, while sizeable, may not be as significant as predicted.

Summary of Economic Impacts

A report by Ernst & Young forecasts a number of economic benefits to the 2015 Rugby World Cup, including over $2 million in economic output, and a direct boost to GDP of $463 million (Arnold and Grice, 2015; summarised in Table 1). Media promoting these benefits is widespread, with the Ernst & Young report often cited to describe and support the positive impacts of the 2015 Rugby World Cup. The many media examples include Bergson (2015), Menary (2015), and Wilson (2015). Due to the credibility of the financial services firm Ernst & Young (Aubin, 2012), as well as the wide-spread publication of these results, the economic impact by Arnold and Grice (2015) will be used as the basis for this analysis, as summarised in Table 1.
Contribution Type Impact Category Impact Source Amount (millions)
Output Direct Visitor Spend Ticket revenue (international) Infrastructure investment Fanzone spend Stadia spend $869 $68 $85 $5 $13
Indirect and induced $1,165
GDP Direct Visitor spend Ticket revenue (international) Infrastructure contribution Fanzone spend Stadia contribution $391 $29 $35 $2 $6
Indirect and induced $518
Table 1. Summarised from Arnold and Grice (2015, pp18-20) For the purpose of this analysis, direct impact is considered to be initial spending stimulus arising from the event, including infrastructure expenditure and ticket revenue. Indirect economic impacts result from transactions that occur as a result of the initial spending, such as additional tourism expenditure in other areas. Induced impacts are the result of increased consumer spending due to higher income, such as greater support for sports and health overall. These definitions are outlined by Saayman and Saayman (2012, p223) and are consistent with the examples provided in the report by Arnold and Grice (2015).

Support and improvements for the Forecasted Economic Impact

Financial Stimulus

The publicity of a major sporting event is said to improve the local brand overall, resulting in additional foreign investment, including business and tourism. While arguably temporary, this publicity can stimulate activity during a time of economic slowdown, which in turn creates indirect economic impacts such as increased demand for manufacturing, and induced effects such as higher overall employment, in particular in the hospitality industry (Arnold and Grice, 2015; Statistics New Zealand, 2012). While purely financial transactions are not included as part of GDP increases (McConnell et. al, 2010), some GDP growth may occur on the back of a strong financial market, driven by the Rugby World Cup. Increased publicity for the host country, coupled with high consumer excitement and mass sponsorship exposure may explain why share prices tend to improve during mass sporting events. For example, during the 2013 Wimbledon, the 10 largest listed companies in Scotland experienced a 7.5% increase in share price, while the FTSE100 increased by 5.1% (Thanapathy, 2015). In addition, the first trading week following the announcement of a significant sponsorship agreement saw sponsoring companies in the U.S.A. experience significant share price gains (Harrow and Swatek, 2011). While not mentioned in the report by Arnold and Grice (2015), an induced economic impact to the Rugby World Cup may be increasing investment in additional goods and services, as business confidence increases due to the strong financial market.

The Multiplier Effect and Social Good

An additional contributor to GDP and output is the result of the multiplier effect, that is, the increase in investment bringing about a disproportionate increase in GDP via spending and re-spending (Saayman and Saayman, 2012; McConnell et. al, 2010). The multiplier effect during an event such as the Rugby World Cup is likely to be significant, not only through increased consumer and business spending, but in areas such as an increased interest in sports, which in turn encourages a higher focus on public health overall. The social benefits of large sporting events are evident in the Comrades Marathon, where induced economic impacts included the benefits of increased income and spending reaching the poor. Saayman and Saayman (2012) note that their findings regarding the social benefits of the Comrades Marathon are consistent with broader literature, which also finds the economic impact of large scale sporting events reaches both rich and poor. Thus the direct impact of increased output and income generated by the Rugby World Cup is likely to increase GDP more than the initial investment, creating indirect and induced impacts via the multiplier effect.

Including both Domestic and International spend

When measuring economic impact, Arnold and Grice (2015) exclude domestic spend on sporting events because, it is argued, this money would remain in the economy regardless, being spent elsewhere if not on the Rugby World Cup. However, domestic spend may also be relevant as this recreational income could easily be spent in a different economy, were it not for this event (Saayman and Saayman, 2012). Given the proximity of England to European destinations, and the cultural relevance of Soccer in England and Europe (Gibbons, 2014), it is likely that English income would be spent in other countries if the Rugby World Cup was held elsewhere – either to another destination for a holiday, or to the country hosting the World Cup. During the 2011 Rugby World Cup in New Zealand, the second most popular tourist origin was direct from the U.K.; a significant number of additional sports tourists from the U.K. arrived via Australia (Statistics New Zealand, 2011). Thus both domestic and international expenditure on the Rugby World Cup 2015 is significant. Amending visitor and ticket revenue, and revenue derived from food and beverages, to include domestic consumers may be more accurate than focusing solely on additional international income. New Zealand, for example, note an increase in domestic household spending during the Rugby World Cup 2011, driven primarily by food and beverage, in addition to international spend (Statistics New Zealand, 2011). Similar to the Canadian analysis of Sports Tourism, domestic income may be included on a separate line for clarity and completeness (The Outspan Group Inc, 2009). While this may serve to increase forecasted output by increasing overall predicted spend, as discussed under 'Forecasting Ticket Sales', it is also possible that international spend reduces the economic impact of domestic expenditure in some areas, as the two may net each other out.

Limitations and Challenges to the Forecasted Economic Impact

The tendency to over-estimate

Historically, the economic impacts of sporting events have been overestimated by host countries (Leeds and Von Allmen, 2008; Horrow and Swatek, 2011). For example, the economic impact of the 2002 World Cup fell significantly short of the estimated $31 billion (Leeds and Von Allmen, 2008). While GDP and consumption was affected during the 2011 Rugby World Cup, New Zealand reports that it "did not contribute to the New Zealand economy, as measured in the BoP and national accounts" (Statistics New Zealand, 2011). The Super Bowl XL publicised an economic impact of $300million on the back of sports tourism exceeding expectations, however figures later released by the Michigan Department of Treasury suggest the actual economic impact was negligible (Horrow and Swatek, 2011). It is thus highly possible that the economic impact for England has been similarly over-estimated.

Economic Impact Intention

As a general rule, economic impact reports measure total, as opposed to net, activity or income (Saayman and Saayman, 2012), and for this reason may appear overly positive compared to more balanced analyses, such as cost-benefit, where expenditure as well as income is considered. While economic impact is sometimes defined as net benefit (Crompton, 2006 in Saayman and Saayman, 2012), the more widely accepted definition is "monetary payments as they move through a regional economy" for the purpose of measuring the impact of an event as it relates to that economy (Tyrrrell and Johnston, 2006, p3). While omitting additional costs is technically correct, it can seem misleading in journal articles written for the general public, who may be unaware of these definitions. The article by Menary (2015), for example, presents an unrealistically optimistic view of the financial viability of the Rugby World Cup, as the public is only made aware of gains. Direct economic impacts, such as the $68 million in ticket revenue noted in the report by Arnold and Grice (2015) may return a far lower figure once additional costs such as administration have been taken into account. It is possible that GDP and output will increase by the stated amounts, however for a complete picture, more than the standard economic impact should be considered.

Forecasting: Ticket Sales as Incremental Income

It is possible that locals would attend the Rugby World Cup in place of tourists, were it not for the "influx of football fans" (Leeds and Von Allmen, 2008, p233) – a possibility that nets out the impact of international spend on tickets to some degree, since the international income is replacing local income – not adding to it. Further understanding local activity – the propensity to travel and attend local events - is therefore vital in understanding the true economic impact of international spending during the Rugby World Cup in 2015. As noted by Saayman and Saayman (2012, p232): "in order to increase the economic benefit of the event, expanding both these markets might be worthwhile". Further, one way Arnold and Grice (2015, p8) forecast ticket revenue and consumer interest is by measuring the historic percentage of seats filled during World Cup Events. While these percentages have hovered around 95% for the past two events, it is not known how many of these tickets were paid for, given away, or scalped. In the 2000 Olympics, for example, questions were raised regarding the distribution of tickets to sponsors and hospitality companies, while in the 2012 Summer Olympics, London began distributing free tickets to fill stadiums during events (Freid et. al., 2013). Predicting public interest is not as simple as measuring seats filled, and it is possible that increased output as a result of tickets sales is overstated.

Timeframe: Impact of one-off vs repetitive events

A number of impact drivers for the 2015 Rugby World Cup are short-term, which may help explain why the estimated benefits, in particular the induced benefits and assumptions regarding the multiplier effect, may be overstated. While regular, local events use existing infrastructure, require lower levels of investment, and have ongoing effects (Higham in Ritchie and Adair, 2004, p135), it is possible that larger events experience more temporary economic impacts, as the related investment is for a unique, rather than an ongoing, event. In Japan, for example, Saitama currently spends nearly $4 million per year maintaining a stadium built to host the 2002 Rugby World Cup, despite the venue now only drawing around 20,000 spectators for local sporting events (Leeds and Von Allmen, 2008). In the U.S.A., an "abundance of abandoned and crumbling sports places" exist, many less than 20 years old (Horrow and Swatek, 2011, p3). As noted above under 'The Tendency to Overestimate', New Zealand experienced increased economic activity during the Rugby World Cup in 2011; however the long term impact was not as significant (Statistics New Zealand, 2011). When measuring the economic impact in England, Arnold and Grice (2015, p11) refer to an induced economic impact of further investment on the back of "a lasting legacy for the sport". In addition, infrastructure investment is listed as the second most influential direct economic impact. However, given the results in New Zealand, the U.S.A., Japan and Korea, and the nature of large, relatively infrequent sporting events, it is possible these benefits have been overstated, particularly in the long term.

Conclusion

In conclusion, it is likely the economic impact of the 2015 Rugby World Cup, as outlined by Arnold and Grice (2015), is a good overview. Increased economic activity leads to direct impacts including increased output and GDP driven by higher foreign and corporate investment, such as sports tourism and corporate branding respectively. Indirect impacts include high intermediary activity, including increases in the hospitality industry and spend on food and beverages, while induced benefits are as far reaching as social support driven by higher consumer income and the multiplier effect. While these impacts are positive, it is believed the magnitude of the results have been exaggerated, due to limitations including the tendency of host countries to overestimate the impact of sporting events, and the temporary effects of short-term events – even those as large as the Rugby World Cup. Further, due to the scope of an economic impact statement, many costs have gone unmentioned, creating a disproportionate impression of gains and optimism.

References

  • Aubin, D., 2012, 'Ernst's revenues rise 6.7 percent on advisory growth', Reuters, Available through https://www.reuters.com/article/2012/10/01/us-ernst-revenues-idUSBRE8901GS20121001
  • Bergson, Z. 2015, 'Sports and Money: Economic Impact of the Rugby World Cup', National Centre for Business Journalism, Sept 14 2015, Available through https://businessjournalism.org/2015/09/sports-and-money-economic-impact-of-the-rugby-world-cup/
  • Arnold, P. and Grice, M., 2015, 'The Economic Impact of the Rugby World Cup 2015', Ernst & Young, Available through https://www.ey.com/Publication/vwLUAssets/EY-rugby-world-cup-final-report/$FILE/EY-rugby-world-cup-final-report.pdf
  • Freid, G., DeSchriver, T. and Mondello, M., 2013, Sports Finance, 3rd Ed., U.S.A.: Human Kinetics
  • Harrow. R, and Swatek, K., 2011, Beyond the Scoreboard, U.S.A.: Human Kinetics
  • Gibbons, T., 2014, English National Identity and Football Fan Culture, Surrey: Ashgate Publishing Ltd.
  • Leeds, M. and Von Allmen, P., 2008, The Economics of Sports, 3rd ed., Boston: Pearson
  • McConnell, C, Brue, S, Flynn, S. and Barbiero, T., 2010, Macroeconomics, 12th ed., Canada: McGraw Hill Ryerson
  • Menary, S. 2015, 'Rugby to prove lucrative game as World Cup kicks off', The National: Business, Sept 17 2015, Available through https://www.thenational.ae/business/economy/rugby-to-prove-lucrative-game-as-world-cup-kicks-off
  • Outspan Group Inc, The., 2009, The Economic Impacts of Cultural and Sport Tourism in Canada 2007, Amherst Island: The Outspan Group Inc.
  • Ritchie, B. and Adair D. (eds)., 2004, Sport Tourism: Interrelationships, Impacts and Issues, U.K.: Channel View Publications
  • Saayman, M. and Saayman, A., 2012, 'The Economic Impact of the Comrades Marathon', International Journal of Event and Festival Management, Vol3 (3), 05 Oct 2012, pp220-235
  • Statistics New Zealand, 2011, 'Impact of the Rugby World Cup in New Zealand's macro-economic statistics', Statistics New Zealand, Available through https://www.stats.govt.nz/browse_for_stats/economic_indicators/NationalAccounts/impact-of-rugby-world-cup.aspx
  • Thanapathy, S. 2015, 'Off the Pitch: The winners and losers of the Rugby World cup', Australian Times: Sport, 25 Sept 2015, Available through https://www.australiantimes.co.uk/off-the-pitch-the-winners-and-losers-of-the-rugby-world-cup/
  • Tyrrell, J. and Johnston, R., 2006, 'The Economic Impact of Tourism', Journal of Travel Research, Vol. 45, Aug 1 2006, Available through Deep Dyve at https://www.deepdyve.com/lp/sage/the-economic-impacts-of-tourism-a-special-issue-RCkCF7L8ja?articleList=%2F
  • Wilson, B. 2015, 'Rugby World Cup a global game changer, says RFU's Ritchie', BBC News: Business, 24 Sept 2015, Available through https://www.bbc.com/news/business-34130763
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Rugby World Cup 2015 Essay Example for College Students. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Musical Essay Online for Free

The nature of musical communication and the framework of thought, feeling and behaviour within which this communication takes place.

Musical communication is commonly associated with place or location; for instance a piece of music will often bring about a flood of memories recalling the place the piece was heard, perhaps the people in whose company the time listening to the piece was spent and certainly the mood of the piece. A piano recital is the cultural event we will focus on, using specific examples of piano recitals held around the world, drawing on reports about those recitals from performers and audience alike. The framework of thought, feeling and behaviour which takes place at a piano recital is different from any other cultural environment, primarily because it the most special and intimate of instruments, one which connects the player with the listener in intimate and unmediated communication, in a pure communicative act. The piano is an instrument which evokes extraordinary passion, requires considerable dedication and patience, together with skill and flair to bring about a perfect percussive performance. There are a number of key players in a piano recital, not least the composer who communicates his art to the pianist and onwards, through the instrument, to an audience.

The composer is the translator of musical ideas into a symbolic form, usually the twelve semi-tone scale on a musical stave. The standard Western musical notation is a treble clef and a bass clef. Each note can be between lines or on a line and the piece is given a time signature denoting the rhythm of the music. Other symbols signify changes in tone, pace, volume and feeling. The behaviour of the player is also communicated from the composer to the pianist using symbols, including Italianate adjectives, although with more modern piano pieces the Italianate is often replaced with words from the composers’ usual vocabulary.

Examples include piano, meaning quiet and forte, meaning loud. The nature of this communication is symbolic, or in the words of Roland Barthes, the literary critic, semiotic Barthes (Barthes 1977) views semiology as underlying all communication, an ’empire of the signs’ that extends over film and photography, music criticism and reading and writing as historically situated activities. He identifies two natures of music: There are two musics (at least so I have always thought): the music one listens to, the music one plays. These two musics are totally different arts, each with its own history, its own sociology, its own aesthetics, its own erotic; the same composer can be minor if you listen to him, tremendous if you play him (even badly) – such as Schumann. (Barthes 1977, p. 149) We will employ this distinction between passive and active to our discussion of the piano recital, where passive music is the music we listen to and active music is the music we play.

Schumann is the composer we will focus on when discussing the cultural event that is the piano recital. Robert Schumann was a significant figure in German musical romanticism. (Jensen 2001) Schumann specialised in writing lyrical piano music and songs, but also composed notable orchestral choral and chamber works. He literary output was motivated by his love of literature which informed his musical criticism and composition. He was forced to abandon his career as a pianist after critically damaging, with a strengthening device, a finger on his right hand. Schumann wrote piano works that were a linking of short sections, such as Kreisleriana and Carnaval. Linked together, these sections paid extreme attention to detail, forming an interlocking composition. A talented music journalist, he was editor on one of the most significant journals of his day, Die Neue Zeitschrift für Musik. In 1840 he wrote over a hundred songs, a year that became known as his year of song, including the song cycles Dichterliebe and Liederkreise. Schumann suffered from depression and mental instability as a result of syphilis and died in an asylum. Schumann believed that musical communication was under attack from virtuoso players who had little thought or feeling for music. His mission statement was given in his journal Die Neue Zeitschrift für Musik, which, perhaps in spite of its name suggesting new music, promoted music proven by history – music which had withstood the test of time.

His era saw the rise of piano virtuosity from players who wanted to become celebrities in their own right without recognition of whose music it was they played, going so far as to compose pieces without thought about the framework of the musical communication, preferring technical complexities over clearly communicated music. Their ignorance of the thought, feeling and behaviour of composers, said Schumann, was philistine. He thus founded the Davids bündler, or League of David, named after the biblical King David, who composed music, wrote poetry and slew the Philistines. Barthes speaks of piano recitals as an active form of music that has declined in practice to almost extinction where the piano has been forsaken for the guitar recital: The music one plays has disappeared; initially the province of the idle (aristocratic) class, it lapsed into an insipid social rite with the coming of the democracy of the bourgeoisie (the piano, the young lady, the drawing room, the nocturne) and then faded out altogether (who plays the piano today?). To find practical music in the West, one has now to look to another public, another repertoire, another instrument (the young generation, vocal music, the guitar). (Barthes1977, p. 149) Barthes’ interest in the piano recital as a cultural event for a particular social grouping, the bourgeoisie, is part of his semiotic history, analysable through the distinction between active and passive: Two roles appeared in succession, first that of the performer, the interpreter to whom the bourgeois public (though still able itself to play a little – the whole history of the piano) delegated its playing, then that of the (passive) amateur, who listens to music without being able to play (the gramophone takes the place of the piano). (Barthes 1977, p. 163) We muster cognise that Barthes is writing from a French point of view and that his critique of the piano recital as bourgeois is not necessarily relevant to our discussion of the piano recital as an event instructive for an analysis of the nature of musical communication, although it does give some behavioural insights of the social roles of the performer and the audience at a cultural event, despite its over-politicisation of the framework within communication occurs. There is something more peculiar about Barthes’ role in the study of culture, namely that whenever a term is difficult to define, translators forget their native English tongue, as in this example, again discussing the piano: The melody succumbed to its salon image, this being a little the ridiculous form of its class origin. Mass ‘good’ music (records, radio) has left it behind, preferring either the more pathetic orchestra (success of Mahler) or less bourgeois instruments than the piano (harpsichord, trumpet). (Barthes 1977, p. 187) This is not biased criticism: the death of the French language is acknowledged by Barthes himself, therefore it seems right for us to acknowledge his language together with his semiotics as being nothing more than an exercise in textual ambiguity and irony. (Barthes 1977, pp. 187 – 188) The melody is not significant for the history of the piano recital and is perhaps more relevant to another form of musical communication, such as the voice, however. >From Barthes we do have one definable framework within which musical communication takes place: the political. What Barthes shows is that the nature of music is to some degree governed by the environment in which it takes place, namely the background and political situations of the participants, who in the case of the piano recital are, according to Barthes, middle class. As a descriptive fact, the piano player and the passive audience will behave according to certain middle class conventions or thought or feeling, though what such middle class behaviour might be is not discussed by Barthes, who confines himself to semiological vagueness. How is culture to be evaluated ? According to its origin? Bourgeois.

Its finality? Bourgeois again. According to dialectics? Although bourgeois, this does contain progressive elements; every one of them bourgeoisified. There are some who finally prefer to give up the problem, to dismiss all ‘culture.’ (Barthes1977, p. 211). If piano recitals are to be dismissed as ‘culture’, then we would be obliged to reject Barthesian discourse as overly polemicized, concerned overly with the political and insufficiently with the communicative, because the music of the piano is not bourgeois. Far from it, as Schumann argued, the piano is an instrument through which thought, feeling and behaviour can be transmitted; and although Schumann was not completely apolitical, his compositions must be musical first and foremost. Musical events such as a piano recital have a specific format.

Firstly the audience is seated in front of stage upon which there is a piano. The stage marks the boundary between the active musician and the listeners, who with their programmes know the pieces that will be played, before the recital starts. Secondly, the pieces (whether they are by Schumann or another composer) are performed. Finally, the passive element joins the active element during applause, concluding the event. Musical communication can take the form of quoting ideas from previous musical compositions in new ones. Schumann borrowed from Beethoven, Clara Wieck, and other composers. For the cultural event that is the piano recital, this is the nature of musical communication, because it is history and allows us to place Schumann, or other composers of piano music, in historical context.

Continuing with the example of Robert Schumann, we can say that Schumann borrowed from Beethoven because he came afterwards. Schumann built upon the musical framework left behind by Beethoven in the piano recitals Schumann attended, so much so that he could incorporate Beethovenian thoughts, feelings and behaviour into his own compositions. Amore prosaic framework of musical communication is the biographical context of Robert Schumann’s life.

Schumann was born in 1810 and died at the age of 46, in1856. He was a major figure in German musical romanticism, amongst the leading composers of his day, whose communications are highly regarded. The descriptive term of the time was Neu-Romantisch, or Neo-Romantic, the earlier Romanticism being associated with composers of Beethoven’s period. We should not try to define the meanings of feeling, thought or behaviour within a discussion of German Romanticism. The movement is its own framework, with Schumann at its editorial front, writing for the Davids bündler. Piano music is its own form of musical communication. The music played at a recital is not only a communication from the composer to the audience; it is also a communication of the ideas behind the music, such as in Schumann’s case from Beethoven, to the audience. An educated audience will be able to hear these audible messages.

The programme notes may even identify an idea to the audience explicitly, for instance in a performance of Carnaval, where the final section is March of the Davids bündler against the Philistines. Similarly there is a quotation of a musical theme, also in Carnaval, called Papillons. (Jensen 2001, p. 83) The mood of the piece Carnaval is quixotic, a description that may also be used of Schumann’s nature, because he loved to incorporate cryptic communication within his compositions. For instance, Schumann received the idea for the musical mottos that serve as the basis of Carnaval from the name of the home town, Asch, of a female correspondent. (Jensen 2001, p. 119) There are three combinations of Asch possible, in musical notation: S, C, H, A; AS,C, H; A, S, C, H. All but two of the twenty-one compositions that make up Carnaval use the latter two, which from the German musical system transcribe to the notes A flat, C, B, or A, E flat, C, B. Schumann decided to call the mottos Sphinxes. (Jensen 2001, p. 150) Each of the pieces comprises a musical representation of a masked ball during carnival season. Jensen describes Schumann’s behaviour laconically and contradictorily: It says much about Schumann’s naivete that he was convinced the sphinxes in themselves would create something of a sensation and sales of the work – as if there were widespread interest in such musical games. But for much of his life Schumann was fascinated by puzzles and ciphers, particularly if they could be applied to music. His interest in ciphers was one that was common to not a few writers andarti1sts associated with German Romanticism; Friedrich Schlegel, for example, described art as inner hieroglyphic writing. (Jensen 2001, p. 151, citing Dieckmann 1955, p. 311) We should recognise this relationship between codified musical communication and German Romanticism. It was shared by other writers: Schumann’s interest in cipher, number symbolism, and musical/word puzzles is frequently encountered in his writings. [] Such an approach permitted him to add both mystery and extra musical significance to his works. [] An entire section of Aesthetics is devoted to the creation of secrets and hidden identities, all for the delight of the unravelling of little knots for the reader. (Jensen 2001,pp. 152 – 153, citing Richter 1973, p. 195) In conclusion, a framework of communication, we have shown, can be semiological, cryptic and political.

Barthes’ semiological analysis of a piano recital tends towards the political, with his disdain for the bourgeois influencing his dislike of the politics of those attending piano recitals. If Schumann is played at a piano recital, there are semiological frameworks of musical communication derived from Schumann’s interest in musical code. What is certain is that the historical context for each, the composer and the cultural analyst equally, is of paramount importance Without musical communication with Beethoven, Schubert would not have composed vastly different piano pieces, not to mention the pieces he composed for other instruments; and without a French social milieu Barthes might have had more tolerance for the piano recital as an excellent cultural event through which to investigate the nature of musical communication. As an event, the piano recital will generate a flood of memories for the active player and the passive audience, whose mood will be affected by the communication of thought, feeling and behaviour of the composer and by the music. Therefore historical is probably the best discussion of the specific type of cultural event that is the piano recital, because the music is historical, as is the event, and the environment.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Musical Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Testimony Definition Example for Free

When individuals either witness or are a victim of crime they may be required to give evidence in court. This can involve recounting events that took place or identifying a suspect from an identity parade. Evidence presented in a trial contributes to a judge or jury deciding whether an individual is innocent or guilty and if the information provided by the eyewitness is incorrect then innocent people may be found guilty or guilty people may go free (Loftus, 1986). With DNA testing, many individuals initially identified by eyewitnesses as being the perpetrator have subsequently been found to be innocent (Wells and Olson, 2003). Therefore, it is important that eyewitness testimony presented in court is accurate. The following essay will present research that has investigated why eyewitness testimony can be inaccurate and may consequently not be relevant in a court case. The essay will also consider whether children are accurate and reliable eye witnesses.

Reconstructive Memory and Schemas

When individuals observe an unusual event, such as a crime, their memory is often affected by their mental schemata, which involves prior knowledge and factors such as cultural background and values, and not solely information from the event. If there are gaps in people's understanding of an incident they can reconstruct their memories so that they can make sense of them. The notion of reconstructive memory was proposed by Bartlett (1932, cited in Toglia, 2007, pp.240-241). Witnesses' memories may be influenced by events that occur after the crime, for example, information from news reports in the media or other witnesses talking immediately after the event about what they saw or heard. This is relevant in particular to witnesses who observe one part of an event who then incorporate such information to elaborate and reconstruct their own memories. Toglia (2007) states that this is known as the misinformation effect and also source misattribution, which occurs when witnesses are unable to remember where the information originated from and they are then seen as being unreliable and not relevant to the court procedure. In their 1974 study, Loftus and Palmer found that the wording of questions affected the recall of witness. Participants watched a film of a car accident and were then asked to write a brief summary of what they had seen. They were then were asked questions about the accident using different verbs to describe the accident such as, 'how fast were the cars going when they smashed/hit/bumped each other?' (Loftus and Palmer, 1974, p.586). The different words implied that the car was travelling at different speeds with some words implying a faster speed than other words. It was found that there was a 9 mile per hour difference between the slowest and fasted estimated speeds of the cars made by the participants. One week later, the participants returned and were asked further questions including 'did you see any broken glass' and, depending on the verb used in the original question, the faster the car was perceived to be travelling, the more participants reported seeing broken glass, even though there was no glass in the film (Loftus and Palmer, 1974, p.587). The study supports Bartlett and the way in which witnesses can reconstruct their memories with their previous knowledge. In a similar study, Loftus and Zanni (1975) reported that more participants said they had seen the broken headlight, rather than participants who were asked if they had seen a broken headlight, even there was no broken headlight in the film. However, both studies were undertaken in a laboratory environment and involved participants watching films, therefore it may not be possible to generalise the findings to the way witnesses respond when witnessing real-life accidents. The studies show the importance of the way in which language can alter perceptions or memories of an event. This has been addressed by introducing a cognitive interview technique which Fisher, Geiselman and Raymond (1987) suggest avoids influencing the answers given by witnesses. If a car was travelling fast and was involved in an accident, it would be expected that there would be glass or a broken headlight, even though the witnesses (participants) did not see any in the film scenario. Individuals use their schemas to explain what happens in certain situations for example, how a burglar behaves or what type of objects would be present in a specific context, for example, the layout inside a bank or restaurant. Therefore, if something unusual is seen Loftus, Loftus and Messo (1987) argue that a witness will pay more attention to the unusual object. This has been found to be the case for crimes where weapons are involved. Participants in the Loftus et al. study were shown a series of slides of a crime in a fast-food restaurant where a customer either pointed a gun or a cheque at the cashier. It was found that there were more eye fixations on the gun than the cheque. In a second study, it was found that participant's memory for events was poorer in the weapon scenario than in the cheque condition which according to Loftus et al. (1987) emphasises the focus on weapons.

The Effect of Stress on Witnesses.

Observing a weapon in a crime may cause a witness considerable stress and this may have an effect on their ability to accurately remember details. This has been demonstrated by Clifford and Scott (1978) in a study that involved participants watching a film of a violent attack and a control group that watched a less violent version of the film. It was found that participants who watched the violent film remember fewer details than the control group. As the study was conducted in a laboratory, it is possible that the stress experienced by witnesses to violent events is greater in real-life crime and therefore, suggests that accurate recall may be impaired. A review of the literature undertaken by Deffenbacher, Bornstein, Penrod and McGorty (2004) undertook a review of studies that investigated the effects of stress on eye witnesses and found support for the negative effects of stress on accurate recall. Stress was notably higher, for example, if suspect was present in a line-up in comparison to the suspect being absent. A number of studies have attempted to induce stress-related scenarios to study the effects on participants as witnesses, although it could be suggested that this is unethical as it may cause the participants psychological harm. However, in a study with real-life witnesses who had been present during a robbery at gun shop where the perpetrator was shot dead, Yuille and Cutshall (1986) argue that stress may not have an adverse effect on memory and eyewitness testimony. The witness in the gun shop event had very accurate and clear memories of the event, which endured over a period of 5 months.

Intergroup Bias

Another factor that may influence the accurate memory of a crime in intergroup bias. Lindholm and Christianson (1998) found that the eyewitness testimony of Swedish students taking part in a mock crime scenario involving an armed robbery was influenced by whether the perpetrator was Swedish (in-group perpetrator) or an immigrant (out-group perpetrator). The participants in the study were both immigrant and Swedish students and when both groups were shown the film and asked to identify the perpetrator in a line-up afterwards the majority incorrectly identified an innocent immigrant. Both groups of participants typically identified an innocent perpetrator who was ethnically dissimilar more often than an innocent Swede. The study appears to show that witnesses can be influenced by biases and expectations regarding the type of person who is more likely to commit a certain type of crime. However, because the study involves a mock crime scenario it lacks the emotional aspects of a real crime and witnesses may not have the same biases they demonstrate in a laboratory task. Loftus (1986) reports that in cross-racial identification by eyewitness, individuals are less accurate at identifying a member of a different ethnic group or culture than identifying features of a person's own race. Such findings would appear to be particularly relevant in contemporary, multi-racial society in the UK, and other countries. Alderson (2010) reports that the majority of men held for violent and sexual crimes in inner city London between 2009 and 2010 were black, however, black men have also been found to constitute the greatest number of victims of crime (e.g. 29% male victims of gun crimes, 24% of knife crimes). This can lead to the stereotyping of certain groups such as black men being responsible for violent actions in comparison to white men as found by Duncan (1976).

Children as Eye-Witnesses

There have been some concerns expressed regarding the relevance and reliability of children as witnesses. There may also be concerns about older people as West and Stone (2013) for example, report that young adults are more accurate in their recall as witnesses than older adults. Children who appear as witnesses in a court case may have been exposed to very stressful events such as sexual or physical abuse, which would be unethical to replicate in laboratory conditions. According to Bidrose and Goodman (2000), childhood sexual abuse is additionally accompanied by feelings of shame as well as a lack of emotional support because of the secrecy that surrounds such events. In a study undertaken by Bidrose and Goodman, they investigated the testimony given by four female children aged between 8 and 15 years, in a sexual abuse case in New Zealand and also assessed the level of support regarding the allegations. The findings showed that there was a high degree of support for the children's allegations which was matched to audiotapes and photos of the abuse (Bidrose and Goodman, 2000). The real-life study indicates that children's testimony can be highly accurate although the children in the study were older and younger children may not be able to articulate what happened to them in cases of abuse. KrA¤henbA¼hl, Blades and Eiser (2009) conducted a study with 156 children aged between 4 and 9 years to investigate the effects of repeating questions several times in an interview situation as a witness. The children watched a staged event and were asked eight open-ended questions, each of which was repeated 4 times. Some questions could be answered from watching the scenario although others could not, and it was expected that the children would say that they did not know the answer. The children returned again after one week. It was found that for over 25% of children there was a decline in accuracy which was greatest after the first repetition of questions. There was little change with the questions that could be answered but considerable decline in accuracy with those questions with no accurate answers. KrA¤henbA¼hl et al. (2009) concluded that if there is considerable repetition of questions with child witnesses, the accuracy of responses changes significantly and that if children cannot answer a question, they are more likely to fabricate answers with repeated questioning.

Conclusion

The evidence presented indicates that there are a number of problems around the issue of eyewitness testimony although it would appear that research has attempted to address some of the problems. This means that eyewitness testimony should be considered a valuable and relevant part of court procedure. Avoiding leading questions (Loftus and Palmer, 1974) and the introduction of the cognitive interview technique (Fisher et al. 1987) have helped to contribute to the more accurate recall of witnesses. Some problems are less easy to address, such as the stress experienced at a crime scene which may negatively affect recall although, Yuille and Cutshall (1986) have argued that in real-life witnesses are able to recall stressful events accurately. Similarly, intergroup biases are difficult issues to address in particular the perceptions of black people and their relationship with crime. Children as witnesses has a more positive outcome as their recall has been shown to be accurate (Bidrose and Goodman, 2000). A further problem is that of the methodology used when researching eyewitness testimony which is predominately undertaken in a laboratory and may not be generalisable to real-life situations.

References

Alderson, A. (2010). Violent inner-city crime, the figures, and a question of race. The Telegraph Newspaper, Retrieved on 5/10/2015 from; https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/crime/7856787/Violent-inner-city-crime-the-figures-and-a-question-of-race.html. Bidrose, S. and Goodman, G.S. (2000). Testimony and evidence: A scientific case study of memory for child sexual abuse. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 14, 197-213. Clifford, B.R. and Scott, J. (1978). Individual and situational factors in eyewitness memory. Journal of Applied Psychology, 63, 352-359. Deffenbacher, K.A., Bornstein, B.H., Penrod, S.D. and McGorty, E.K. (2004). A meta-analytic review of the effects of high stress on eyewitness memory. Law and Human Behavior, 28(6), 687-706. Duncan, S.L. (1976). Differential social perception and attribution of intergroup violence: testing the lower limits of stereotyping of blacks. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 34, 590-598. Fisher, R.P., Geiselman, R.E. and Raymond, D.S. (1987). Critical analysis of police interviewing techniques. Journal of Police Science and Administration, 15, 177-185. KrA¤henbA¼hl, S., Blades, M. and Eiser, C. (2009). The effects of repeated questioning on children's accuracy and consistency in eyewitness testimony. Legal and Criminological Psychology, 14(2), 263-278. Linholm, T. and Christianson, S.A. (1998). Intergroup biases and eyewitness testimony. Journal of Social Psychology, 138(6), 710-723. Loftus, E.F. and Palmer, J.C. (1974). Reconstruction of automobile destruction: An example of the interaction between language and memory. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 13, 585-589. Loftus, E.F. (1986). Experimental psychologist as advocate or impartial educator. Law and Human Behavior, 10(1/2), 63-78. Loftus, E.F. and Zanni, G. (1975). Eyewitness testimony: The influence of the wording of a question. Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society, 5, 86-88. Loftus, E.F., Loftus, G.R. and Messo, J. (1987). Some facts about weapon focus. Law and Human Behavior, 11, 55-62 Toglia, M.P. (2007). Handbook of Eyewitness Psychology. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Wells, G.L. and Olson, E.A. (2003). Eyewitness testimony. Annual Review of Psychology, 54, 277-295. West, R.L. and Stone, K.R. (2013). Age differences in eyewitness memory for a realistic event. Journals of Gerontology, Series B, 69(3), 338- 347. Yuille, J.C. and Cutshall, J.L. (1986). A case study of eyewitness memory of a crime. Journal of Applied Psychology, 71, 291-301.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Testimony Definition Example For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Play in Early Years Example for Free

In the 18th-19th centuries, industrialisation caused some serious changes in the lives of people (Knight, 2009). In the UK, for instance, industrialisation significantly decreased the schools’ provision of outdoor activities. However, such educators as Friedrich Froebel, Margaret McMillan and Maria Montessori contributed much to the revival of interest in outdoor play. Due to their efforts, the outdoor play provision occupies a crucial place in a contemporary early years setting.

This essay analyses the issue of outdoor play in an early years setting. It will start with the definition of the concept of outdoor play and will proceed with the discussion of the first early-years practitioners who accentuated the need to integrate outdoor play into the curriculum. The analysis will then discuss in more detail the significance and use of outdoor play in an early years setting, juxtaposing theoretical and empirical evidence. Finally, the essay will identify the challenges to the successful provision of outdoor play in an early years setting. In view of the fact that children perceive and interact with the world using different senses, it is essential for early years practitioners to use the methods which provide children with an opportunity to learn through these senses (Ouvry, 2000). Play is especially effective for learning because play evokes positive feelings in children and thus motivates them to learn (Ouvry, 2000). According to Johnston and Nahmad-Williams (2014), it is rather difficult to understand what constitutes play within an early years setting because educators and researchers cannot agree on whether to consider structured play (e.g. play activities developed by early years practitioners) as play. Johnston and Nahmad-Williams (2014, p.273) define outdoor play as “a carefully planned outdoor environment that covers the six areas of learning”. These six areas include: 1) physical development; 2) creative development; 3) social, personal, and emotional development; 4) understanding of the world; 5) literacy, language, and communication; 6) reasoning, problem solving, and numeracy (DCSF, 2008). In contemporary early years settings, two types of outdoor play are used: free play and structured play (Johnston and Nahmad-Williams, 2014). Free play is initiated by children: in free play, children choose the resources and materials to play with, although early years practitioners are responsible for preparing the materials. In free play, early years practitioners do not control play; however, they supervise children and provide necessary support. In this regard, free play reinforces children’s independence and their interactions with each other (Johnston and Nahmad-Williams, 2014). In structured play, it is an early years practitioner who chooses the resources and materials and who prepares specific tasks for children to complete (Johnston and Nahmad-Williams, 2014). Although structured play activities are created taking into account children’s interests and needs, structured play is controlled by an early years practitioner who ensures that specific learning outcomes are met. Friedrich Froebel (1782-1852) was one of the first advocates of outdoor play in an early years setting (Riddall-Leech, 2002; Knight, 2009). According to Froebel, outdoor play contributes to the development of children’s imagination which is essential for successful learning and healthy growth. It was Froebel who opened a kindergarten in Germany to integrate the outdoor play provision. A significant focus in this provision was put on imaginative play and play with wooden blocks (Tassoni, 2007). In contrast to Froebel, Maria Montessori (1870-1952) did not consider imaginative play as crucial for children’s development. A doctor and educator who mainly worked with children with specific learning needs and who opened Children’s Houses for working class children, Montessori stimulated young children to actively participate in real life outdoor activities and thus acquire knowledge and develop diverse skills (Tassoni, 2007). She strongly believed that the best way for children to learn was through their interactions with the environment. Montessori put a particular emphasis on structured play, endowing children with constructive play materials and intentionally designed equipment to facilitate their learning (Tassoni, 2007). However, according to Montessori philosophy, early years practitioners are not allowed to interfere into children’s play. In this regard, children learn to develop decision-making skills, independent thinking, and confidence through outdoor play activities.

Many contemporary early years settings are organised, drawing on Montessori’s ideas of structured outdoor play environment (Tassoni, 2007). Margaret McMillan (1860-1931), a social reformer who worked with children from poor families, significantly highlighted the value of outdoor play (Knight, 2009; Ouvry, 2000). In the viewpoint of McMillan, outdoor play is essential for the healthy development of children. She especially emphasised such aspects of outdoor play as fresh air and movement. McMillan contributed much to the spread of a play-centred approach by opening several outdoor nurseries (Knight, 2009). Her first nursery school was opened in Deptford and was organised as a garden “with children flowing freely between inside and out” (Ouvry, 2000, p.5). For McMillan, a professionally structured outdoor setting satisfied all learning needs of children.

One of McMillan’s major requirements towards a professionally structured outdoor setting was to create “a provocative challenging environment” (Tovey, 2010, p.79). It is in such a challenging environment that children acquire rich and diverse experience and thus uncover their true identities (Garrick, 2009). It is in such a challenging environment that children engage in adventurous and creative activities and acquire understanding of the natural world. This environment motivates children to learn. Drawing on the ideas of early years practitioners on outdoor play, contemporary researchers and authors also widely discuss the significance of outdoor play in an early years setting. For instance, Garrick (2009) acknowledges that outdoor play significantly reinforces children’s physical development. Baldock (2001) accentuates the ability of outdoor play to shape children’s spatial skills and decision-making skills due to the acquired independence. In her action research, Nind (2003) drew the parallels between independent outdoor play and improved language competence.

The findings of Nind’s (2003) study showed that children who had problems with English as a foreign language more actively engaged in communication in the outdoor play setting. Playing outdoors, they behaved in a more independent way and employed a variety of communication strategies to share their views with peers. However, Manning-Morton and Thorp (2003) and Siraj-Blatchford and Sylva (2004) point at the need to create a balance between outdoor activities planned by early years practitioners and children’s free activities. In the case of free activities, children acquire an opportunity to explore the outer world and express their selves through these activities. Planned outdoor activities are also crucial as they improve children’s cognitive skills, social skills, and creativity. In their study of early years settings, Siraj-Blatchford et al. (2002, p.8) have found that outdoor play activities are especially effective if they are based on the adult-child interaction because such interaction reinforces “sustained shared thinking, an episode in which two or more individuals ‘work together’ in an intellectual way to solve a problem, clarify a concept, evaluate activities, extend a narrative”. Despite the discussed positive effects of outdoor play on children in an early years setting, there are some factors that prevent its successful provision. According to Garrick (2009, p.x), although UK statutory guidance recognises outdoor play as a crucial aspect of an early years curriculum, “currently there is no requirement in England to develop outdoor areas as a condition of registration”. According to UK statutory guidance, early years practitioners are recommended to use parks and similar facilities for outdoor play if early years settings lack outdoor areas (DCSF, 2008). Garrick (2009) goes further by claiming that early years settings with outdoor areas are often poorly equipped and thus do not provide many possibilities for learning.

Ouvry (2000), Maynard and Waters (2007), and Johnston and Nahmad-Williams (2014) have found out that early years practitioners in English settings are often reluctant to integrate the outdoor play provision because they are too obsessed with health and safety issues. In more specific terms, they are afraid that cold and windy weather is detrimental to children’s health and thus rarely allow young children to play outdoors. The study of Ellis (2002) has brought into light the opinions of ATL (Association of Teachers and Lecturers) members on the outdoor play provision. In the viewpoints of more than 60 percent of teachers, it is difficult to integrate the outdoor play provision because of poor management and the lack of adequate support. Unlike the UK, Scandinavian countries widely integrate the outdoor play provision which draws on Froebel philosophy (Knight, 2009). In particular, a range of Forest Schools have been opened in Denmark, Sweden, and other Scandinavian countries. In these schools, the emphasis is put on free outdoor activities, the development of social skills and creativity in children, and children’s emotional well-being (Knight, 2009). In these schools, children engage in outdoor activities in different weather conditions. In the 1990s, the early years practitioners from Bridgwater College visited the Danish Forest School and greatly admired the way children acquire their skills and knowledge (Knight, 2009). Upon their return, these early years practitioners decided to open a similar school in the UK. They found outdoor areas not far from Bridgwater College and created the outdoor play provision for early years children and children with special needs. The provision has improved children’s overall well-being and has increased children’s confidence, self-esteem, and independent thinking (Knight, 2009). Due to its great achievements in the development of young children, Bridgwater College has received the Queen’s Anniversary Prizes Award. The difference between Forest Schools in Scandinavian countries and Forest Schools in the UK is that UK early years practitioners allow children to play outdoors only in warm weather.

Moreover, UK early years practitioners prefer structured play; thus, learning in these early years setting is more formal than learning in Scandinavian Forest Schools (Knight, 2009). According to Tovey (2010, p.79), children in the UK “are limited by a culture of risk aversion, risk anxiety, restrictions on children’s freedoms to play outdoors and increased regulation”. In Scandinavian countries, children possess more freedom in their outdoor play. Some recent research provides conclusive evidence that young children prefer playing in dangerous and challenging outdoor settings. For instance, Stephenson (2003) and Sandseter (2007), who studied outdoor play in early years settings of Norway and New Zealand, revealed that children specifically chose dangerous, risky, and scary places for their outdoor play. Such places motivated children to engage in the exploration of the unknown and thus overcome their fears. More importantly, Stephenson (2003) and Sandseter (2007) found that each time children played, they intentionally increased risk. Tovey (2010, p.80) specifies that the findings of Stephenson (2003) and Sandseter (2007) suggest that “it is not just the feelings of joy that motivate children but the desire to experience the borderlines of fear and exhilaration”. Taking into account these crucial findings, it is obvious that instead of creating a safe outdoor environment for young children, it is more effective to create a significantly challenging environment in which children are able to uncover all their potential.

While acknowledging the importance of safety issues, Sandseter (2007, p.104) nevertheless proves that early years practitioners should pay equal attention to “the benefits of risky play”. Drawing on the findings of Stephenson (2003) and Sandseter (2007), UK policy makers and early years practitioners should reconsider their views on the outdoor play provision and gradually shift towards the creation of the environment which benefits children rather than hinders their learning and overall development. As the essay has clearly shown, both first early years practitioners and contemporary researchers have accentuated the significance of outdoor play in the development of children. Outdoor play is thought to positively affect children’s spatial skills, social skills, decision-making skills, language competence, and physical health. On the basis of the acquired evidence, it is obvious that the juxtaposition of structured and free outdoor activities is especially effective.

Unfortunately, as the analysis has revealed, there are some serious obstacles to the successful integration of the outdoor play provision in the UK, including the lack of outdoor areas in early years settings, the educators’ obsession with safety and health issues, inadequate support and poor management. Scandinavian countries, however, have significant experience in the integration of the outdoor play provision. Recently, UK early years practitioners have borrowed this experience and have opened several Forest Schools in which children successfully learn through outdoor play.

Bibliography

Baldock, P. (2001). Regulating early years services. London: David Fulton. DCSF (2008). Practice guidance for the Early Years Foundation Stage. Nottingham: Department for Children, Schools and Families. Ellis, N. (2002). Firm foundations? A survey of ATL members working in the Foundation Stage.

London: Association of Teachers and Lecturers. Garrick, R. (2009). Playing outdoors in the early years. London: Continuum International Publishing Group. Johnston, J. & Nahmad-Williams, L. (2014). Early childhood studies. Abington: Routledge. Knight, S. (2009). Forest schools and outdoor learning in the early years. London: Sage. Manning-Morton, M. & Thorp, M. (2003). Key times for play. Maidenhead: Open University. Maynard, T. & Waters, J. (2007). Learning in the outdoor environment: A missed opportunity.

Early Years, 27 (3), 255-265. Nind, M. (2003). Enhancing the communication learning environment of an early years unit through action research. Educational Action Research, 11 (3), 347-363. Ouvry, M. (2000). Exercising muscles and minds: Outdoor play and the early years curriculum.

London: The National Early Years Network. Riddall-Leech, S. (2002). Childminding: A coursebook for the CACHE certificate in childminding practice (CCP). Oxford: Heinemann. Sandseter, E. (2007). Children’s expressions of exhilaration and fear in risky play. Contemporary Issues in Early Childhood, 10 (2), 92-106. Siraj-Blatchford, I. & Sylva, K. (2004). Researching pedagogy in English pre-schools. British Educational Research Journal, 30 (5), 713-730. Siraj-Blatchford, I., Sylva, K., Muttock, S., Gilden, R., & Bell, D. (2002). Researching effective pedagogy in the early years. London: Institute of Education. Stephenson, A. (2003). Physical risk taking: Dangerous or endangered.

Early Years, 23 (1), 35-43. Tassoni, P. (2007). Child care and education: Cache level 3. Oxford: Heinemann. Tovey, H. (2010). Playing on the edge: Perceptions of risk and danger in outdoor play. In: P. Broadhead, J. Howard, & E. Wood (Eds.), Play and learning in the early years: From research to practice (pp.79-94). London: Sage.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Play in Early Years Example For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Motherboard Memory Essay Online for Free

The Modern Computer

Any modern computer carries out two basic tasks that are essential to their purpose - To store and process data - this may seem simple at first but only scratches the surface of what forms of data are operated on, and what those processes are. Modern computers, never simple even during their inception; consist of a mass of interconnected components that work together, each performing their own role and communicating to a Central Processing Unit (CPU) which not only processes' data but also manages the movement of the data around the computer. The essential core components of a computer are the Motherboard, CPU, power supply, main memory and data storage memory as well as an assortment of input and output devices either plugged into or built into the case of a computer, allowing the user of a system to interact with the computer.

The Components in Detail

The role of a power supply unit is fairly straightforward, save that the amount of power required by the computer should always be taken into account when specifying the components of a new computer or when upgrading an existing computer. The other components however require more discussion:

The Motherboard

Arguably the most important component, this is where a bottleneck is most likely to occur because all other components are plugged into a Motherboard, including the CPU - An old motherboard might not support the latest memory or fail to run it at full speed - it is therefore essential that attention is paid to the specification of the motherboard in order to prevent the wrong components being chosen to plug into it. Specific to a motherboard, data travels to and from the CPU to other components, in particular the data storage and input/output devices (Which may themselves be data storage) via a BUS, a term derived via metaphor for how data travels from one component to another arriving at bus stops along the way. Considering the speed of the Front Side Bus is critical when building a performance computer where the CPU needs to be able to receive and return data (processed or otherwise) quickly so that the CPU isn't wasting time waiting for the data to arrive.

The Central Processing Unit

Also arguably the most important component in a computer, the CPU processes data, internally stores data that is actively being processed (Via registers) and manages the movement of data within itself as well as on main/system memory and input/output devices.

Memory and Data Storage

Data that is being used regularly (Note that software programs are also data, just as a number in a spreadsheet or word document is) will be held within a computers main memory for relatively quick access by the CPU, main memory plug in cards such as DDR3 SDRAM (Double Data Rate 3, Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) aim to provide fast transfer of data (low latency, so a request for some data is responded to faster) but have relatively small capacity for storage of large amounts of data. The various forms of Random Access Memory are ‘volatile' - losing the information they contain when the computer is turned off (This does at least make it harder for a virus to lurk in RAM when a computer is shut down). Data storage devices such as Hard Disks (which are internal to the computer) hold data regardless of the powered state of a computer and are ideal for slower access storage of data which isn't being actively used by a computer, this might include a program which hasn't been activated (Or run). Hard Disks are cheaper than main memory and tend to have much larger capacity than RAM. Their one significant weakness however is that when data is being regularly added to and deleted* from a computer the gaps between chunks of data might be used to hold one particular file - This results in ‘fragmentation' where a Hard Disk has to access different points of its surface to get one piece of information. * Data isn't exactly deleted, rather it's marked as safe to over-write with data so even if a file is removed from the deleted files folder in windows, the file could still exist on the computer, at least until it is partially or completely over-written by new data.

Input and Output Devices

This category covers a very wide variety of components which may be solely for input of data into a computer via external devices such as a mouse, keyboard, camera, microphone or a touch pad on a laptop (Equivalent of a mouse). These devices are plugged into the computer, usually into ports in the back of a computer, though some are now working wirelessly and are the primary means with which a human ‘communicates' with a computer. Meanwhile, in order to provide the user of a computer with responses to inputs given, the computer can use output devices (Also plugged or wirelessly connected to the computer) to give the user feedback, most commonly via a monitor and speakers (A ‘click' noise to acknowledge an action), though motherboards are built to handle basic 2D graphics it is common practice to insert a graphics card into a computer which handles processing of graphics and sends the processing out to the monitor, many motherboards now require a graphics card in order to run. Some devices can be regarded as both input and output, such as a headset which includes a microphone for input and earphones for output or a hand held game controller which takes input through buttons and gives feedback through tactile feedback (Rapid shaking/vibration) or even a small internal speaker. There are also data storage devices, mainly Disc Drives which can store data independent of a computer, useful for installing new programs or transferring data from one location to another. Also worth a special mention are Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices which are derived from a technology which allows a computer to understand what the device is, without requiring the installation of some software package first. Many existing devices mentioned above have USB variants that take advantage of this (Along with all USB devices using the same design of ‘port' on the computer itself). Finally, there are input/output devices which are designed to allow a computer to speak to other computers, either via wires or radio waves - These other computers can range from printers and network communication devices to other desktop computers anywhere in the world.

Development of Modern Computers

Currently the main focus on computers seems to be increasing performance and this will be the case for the foreseeable future with faster Processors, Memory and Graphics handling being the focus of efforts to improve performance and reduce power requirements. In addition, there is a battle raging over the latest form of Disc based storage between High Definition DVD (Digital Video Disc) and Blu-Ray, both of which essentially do the same job of storing data for access by a disc drive whilst trying to maximise the speed at which data can be transferred off the disc so that (For example) a higher quality image can be displayed in a video. USB has also been a significant influence on computers - Limiting the abundance of proprietary connectors which only work for one device or range of devices, whilst also making it easier for any device to communicate with a computer when following the USB standard.

Building an Advanced Modern Computer

The first and most important factor to consider before building a computer relates to what the computer is to be used for, the components detailed below are specific to an advanced computer that would be used for the latest generation computer games or for advanced graphics applications such as video editing or 3D computer aided design software. Detailed below is each component, along with reasons for each choice: Case: Jeantech Titan Midi ATX case, Front USB/Audio/Mic, **NO PSU**, https://www.novatech.co.uk/novatech/specpage.html?JEA-TITAN It doesn't tend to be necessary to purchase an expensive case in which all the components are placed, and since many cases tend to sit under a desk away from view an expensive fancy case design seems superfluous. The chosen case doesn't include a Power Supply Unit simply because most cases that come with a PSU included only tend to offer a low power 300 Watt supply. Power Supply Unit: 600W ATX Power Supply for AMD, P3 and P4 mainboards 24Pin, https://www.novatech.co.uk/novatech/specpage.html?NOV-PSU600 The main areas to be careful with a PSU choice are capacity (Suitable for running high powered graphics and processor) and also the number of pins on the PSU unit - It'd be unfortunate if you bought a 20 Pin PSU and then realised that the motherboard requires 24Pins. Motherboard: Asus P5E3 Intel X38 (Socket 775) PCI-Express DDR3 Motherboard, FSB 1333/1066/800 & DDR3 1333/1066/800, https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=MB-250-AS&groupid=701&catid=5&subcat=946 I have found it's generally advisable to focus on a high Front Side Bus and main Memory speed recently, especially with the latest ‘Next Generation' games that are coming onto the market. For instance, the high powered Playstation 3 merely uses a 256Meg Graphics card because that's not actually where a great deal of power is required. Currently, its not possible to purchase a motherboard that has 1600 Mhz Front Side Bus and DDR3 Memory speed (Without over-clocking components) combined though one is due to come out some time during 2008. If the Mhz rating is too low, you will risk having to replace the computer due to obsolescence far sooner than should really be necessary. Processor: Intel Core 2 Duo E8400 LGA775 'Wolfdale' 3.00GHz (1333FSB) - Retail https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=CP-192-IN&groupid=701&catid=6&subcat=793 A Front Side Bus rating of 1333 Mhz has been chosen in order to match up with the upper rating of the motherboard, though you could choose a lower one and upgrade the processor later to save money early on. It's always wise to make sure that the motherboard supports the choice of processor, in this case a Socket 775 (Which essentially designates the configuration and number of pins that the CPU uses to ‘plug into' the motherboard). Memory: OCZ 2GB DDR3 PC3-10666C9 1333MHz Gold (2x1GB) Dual Channel DDR3 (OCZ3G13332GK), https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=MY-093-OC&groupid=701&catid=8&subcat=923 A Front Side Bus rating of 1333 Mhz has been chosen in order to match up with the upper rating of the motherboard, with the option of a slower set of memory early on to save money prior to a later upgrade. For gaming/graphic intensive systems or where some form of rendering or code compiling occurs its advisable to have plenty of memory capacity, at least 2 Gigs worth which has become the standard minimum requirement, you could later add another matched pair of this memory as the motherboard supports 4 slots for DDR3 memory. Graphics Card: Point of View GeForce 8800 GT 512MB GDDR3 HDTV/Dual DVI (PCI-Express) - Retail, https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=GX-015-PV&groupid=701&catid=56&subcat=1008 The motherboard requires a PCI-Express graphics card (By nature of it having slots suitable for PCI-E cards) which are currently the best choice you can get, though there are faster variants (GDDR4 and 5) its debatable if you need faster than that even with the latest crop of next generation computer games being released which tend to place more of a drain on the CPU than on a graphics card. Sufficient capacity, in this case 512MB is required for storing all the textures (images on the surface of a character model and surfaces of a level) that games use to render what's going on. Hard Disk: Western Digital Raptor 150GB 10000RPM SATA 16MB Cache - OEM (WD1500ADFD), https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=HD-069-WD&groupid=701&catid=14&subcat=167 Though the capacity isn't huge it is more than sufficient, the main selling points of this particular hard disk are the high Revolutions per Minute (Which allows a large file to be transferred to memory/processing faster) but also a low seek time (How long it takes to find a new file, in this case 4.6 milliseconds). Monitor: LG L226WT 22" LCD TFT, Silver, 2ms, 16:10, 3000:1 Contrast Ratio, 1680 x 1050 Resolution, DVI, https://www.novatech.co.uk/novatech/specpage.html?LG-L226WT Often times a great deal of focus is placed on the resolution of a monitor, however its also worth considering the Response Time (2ms) which basically dictates how quickly output from a graphics card gets displayed on the screen of a computer. In this case, a widescreen monitor has been chosen because many 3D applications often have side menus with lots of settings and the extra width on the screen provides room for these without intruding on the graphics being displayed toward the centre of the screen. Keyboard: Microsoft Comfort Curve 2000 Keyboard (B2L-00005), https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=KB-054-MS&tool=3 As many gamers are guilty of playing for long hours without a break it's advisable to choose a keyboard this is comfortable to use, this also applies in a work place where its advisable to prevent a worker from getting Repetitive Strain Injuries by making sure the equipment limits that risk. Mouse: Logitech G5 Gaming-Grade Laser Mouse - Retail, https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=KB-069-LG&groupid=702&catid=23&subcat=3 The choice of mouse is dictated by the need for precise recognition of the movements of the mouse, also a higher grade laser limits the chance of random movements of the cursor on a screen which can sometimes occur with standard mice. The option is available to choose a more expensive mouse which includes scripting facilities (Essentially extra buttons that can carry out a chain of functions, such as a sequence of movements), but for most people this is entirely unnecessary. Speakers: Creative Inspire T3100 2.1 Speakers - OEM, https://www.overclockers.co.uk/showproduct.php?prodid=SP-092-CL&tool=3 These speakers will be well suited to most usage, though individual tastes might require a 5.1 surround system or greater - These often involve a large number of trailing cables or an expensive wireless system so may not be the best choice for a desktop computer.
Component Price
Case £21.89
Power Supply Unit £22.32
Motherboard £152.74
Processor £148.04
DDR3 Memory £135.11
Graphics Card £155.09
Hard Disk £116.31
Monitor £187.99
Keyboard £14.09
Mouse £41.11
Speakers £23.49
Total £1018.18
Essential Components Only £751.50
In cases where the computer is simply an upgrade, the monitor, keyboard, mouse and speakers don't tend to require replacement - In which case the value of the computer can be reduced to £751.50. A computer with the specifications should last at least 2 years before reaching obsolescence, especially now that the initial technological surge brought about by the development of the XBOX 360 and Playstation 3 Consoles has reached their peak.

Operating Systems

The next decision is the choice of an appropriate Operating System that is called upon when the computer is ‘booted up'. For the majority of usage that does not involve running a dedicated server, Windows tends to be the better operating system of choice, unfortunately the recent release of Windows Vista appears to have met some issues - Primarily that it is regarded as an even larger system resource drain than Windows XP. Currently Windows XP is the better choice of operating system out of the two as it has reached maturity and is now particularly stable, with the majority of significant bugs and security weakness' ironed out. XP does not support Direct X 10 at this time which means the potential for some graphics not being as rich as they could be, however it has been discovered that there are back door ways of achieving many Direct X 10 features in DX9 which reduces the need to consider Windows Vista for next generation computer games.

Internet Access

Broadband has now become the best choice for accessing the Internet, as there are wide variety of packages available for different kinds of usage from just occasional web browsing to the download of large files or playing online games which require significant bandwidth. The main requirements are access to a cable network near the house (Some areas still don't have cable lines, particularly remote villages and farms) and a Cable Modem which is wired to the computer using either an Ethernet or USB cable. Wireless cable modems/routers are also an option, in these cases it is absolutely essential that the network is pass worded as people have been arrested as a result of someone making unauthorised use of a wireless network for illicit purposes.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Motherboard Memory Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Design and Management Essay Example

Review and evaluate the impact of the proposed Construction (Design and Management)(CDM) Regulations 2006 in the improvement and management of risk.

The proposed changes to the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994 aim to simply clarify the existing regulations; make the current regulations more flexible and compatible with procurement requirements; place the emphasis on the management of health and safety risk rather than creating paperwork and to strengthen the co-ordination and co-operation between designers and contractors. The initial Act was introduced with a view to setting a safety standard because of the large accident record prior to its introduction. The HSC produced a consultation paper explaining the proposed changes on 31 March 2005 with the consultation open until 29 July 2005, though there has been an extension to receive response documents to 31 August 2005, as many were not submitted in time by the time of the consultation on 29 July 2005. The Regulations are expected to come into force in October 2006. The CDM Regulations were made under section 15 of the Health and Safety at Work etc.

Act 1974, the principal Act dealing with securing the health and safety of people at work and those whose health and safety could be affected by work activities. The regulations came into force on 31 March 1995, and implemented provisions of European Directive No. 89/654/EEC, Temporary or Mobile Construction Sites Directive, which specifies a health and safety plan to be adhered to by five key parties to be involved in the Regulations when undertaking a project. These are the employer, planning supervisor, consultant, principal contractor and sub contractors and self-employed persons. The previous approach was statutory, with a view to avoiding unsafe situations. Under regulation 6, the client or the developer must appoint a planning supervisor and a principal contractor. The planning supervisor must notify the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) about the project; fulfil specific requirements regarding design and ensure that the health and safety plan complies with the requirements (Regulations 14 &15). The consultant (or designer) has a duty to design to minimise risks in accordance with health and safety legislation.

The principal contractor has to co-ordinate all contractors to ensure compliance with the health and safety plan. Contractors and self-employed persons have to co-operate with the principal contractor, and to advise of any risks connected with their work. The CDM Regulations 1994 apply to construction work lasting for more than 30 days or involving more than 500 person days of work; construction work involving five or more people on site at any one time; design risk related to construction and demolition work. Prior to the introduction of the CDM Regulations 1994, the accident statistics were 100 fatal accidents annually in the late 1980s. By 1994, the annual total of fatal accidents was reduced to 75, and thereafter, from 1994 to 2004 to between47 and 73, and furthermore for injuries lasting more than three days, the annual total was 17,177 in 1989/1990, which reduced to 8162 in 2003/2004. However, critics of the Regulations referred to the possibility that this may be influenced by a reduction in the amount of construction activity rather than purely as a result of implementation of the CDM Regulations alone. There were inconsistencies in case law; it was considered that a subcontractor has the duty to warn contractor of a design defect for which another party was responsible and scope of implied term as to skill and care in performing contract owed by sub contractor to contractor. In the Court of Appeal case of McCook v Lobo in which an employee was injured on a construction site falling from a ladder, it was decided that although the site owner had breached the CDM Regulations 1994 by failing to prepare a health and safety plan in advance of the commencement of the building work, it was considered that it was unlikely that such a plan would cover the securing of ladders and therefore could not be considered as having caused the injuries. In 2002 the construction Discussion Document (DD) formally recognised that there was a need for changes with regard to the industry’s health and safety performance, and the ensuing discussions led to the conclusion that although the principles underpinning the CDM Regulations were accepted, the methods adopted to implement the CDM Regulations often resulted in the principles being obscured beneath layers of bureaucracy and paperwork. Therefore, the HSC concluded that the CDM Regulations needed to be revised by refocusing attention on effective, but practical, planning and management of construction projects.

The Health and Safety Commission launched a 4 month consultation on its proposals to replace both the current Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994and the Construction (Health Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1996 with a single set of Regulations. A draft set of amended CDM Regulations has been drafted together with a draft of revisions to the Approved Code of Practice by the HSC and the Construction Industry Advisory Committee (CONIAC). The new CDM Regulations were made available for comment in the hope that a set of Regulations can be formed that properly address the industry’s concerns in relation to health and safety and the inadequacies of the current Regulations. The problems with the current Regulations also were argued to include the fact that many of the intended benefits were not being fully realized, contributed to by the difficulty in implementing radical change into the construction industry and the financial implications of full CDM compliance, together with the structure of the regulations themselves, the role of the planning supervisor being unsatisfactory as not being part of the core contraction team. The complexity of the regulations themselves was a problem despite the consensus regarding the underlying ethos remaining valid. The proposed CDM Regulations are intended to be simpler and to remove any uncertainty regarding the nature of the duties imposed. They are also structured differently, setting out precisely what is expected of each duty holder. The changes that have been introduced by the CDM Regulations 2006 include the following: for applicable projects there will be two types of construction projects, notifiable and non-notifiable, and a project will remain notifiable if it is likely to involve more than 30 days or500 person days of construction work. Notification to HSE must be made before design work, planning or preparation for construction begins; for the client, he must ensure there are suitable project management arrangements for health and safety and allocate sufficient resources, explicitly including time, to ensure that this can happen. To make sure principal contractors have sufficient time to make proper preparations for work on the site, the co-ordinator has to advise them of the minimum notice allowed between appointment and commencement of work. The client and the principal contractor must also ensure adequate facilities are in place at the start of the construction phase of the project, by means of a document prepared by the principal contractor setting out the health and safety arrangements and site rules for a project. The client can no longer appoint an agent to delegate these duties, as the provisions on agents will be removed as they are seen as a means to allow clients to absolve themselves of their legal obligations.

Now several clients on the same project can now agree amongst themselves that one client should be the sole client, the aim being to prevent anyone retaining control and avoiding responsibility. Furthermore, the client and the principal contractor must ensure that there are adequate welfare facilities are in place at the commencement of construction; in relation to the planning supervisor/co-ordinator, the planning supervisor has to be replaced by co-ordinator, the co-ordinator must be appointed before the design work commences and designers and contractors cannot be appointed in advance of the coordinator. The designer must eliminate any hazards and reduce risks to the health and safety of persons carrying out construction work, cleaning or maintaining the permanent fixtures or using the structure as a place of work, and provide sufficient information about the design, construction or maintenance of the structure to assist any other designers and the principal contractor fulfil their duties. Further requirements are specified in relation to competence, and it is stated that no appointment or engagement is to be accepted unless the particular person is competent, perhaps in relation to industry standards. In relation to a pre-tender or pre-construction plan this is to be replaced with an information pack that should focus attention on communication of the information that designers and contractors need to plan and do their work. In relation to the health and safety file, this will be required for a site rather than for each particular project. Demolition has to be planned and carried out in such a manner with a view to preventing, as far as possible, unnecessary danger, with arrangements for demolition work recorded in writing. The civil liability that would arise from the introduction of the new Regulations is that employees (though not self-employed workers) will now be permitted to take action in the civil courts for injuries resulting from failure to comply with duties under the Regulations. The new Regulations are regarded as representing a ‘radical and fundamental change in construction health and safety legislation’. The Regulations can be regarded as being much more detailed and prescriptive than CDM Regulations 1994 and will impose a wide range of new duties and potential abilities with a potential significant impact on allocation of risks and responsibilities in the construction industry. It can be argued that the biggest change is in the duties of the client, who now has a number of new responsibilities for health and safety. Furthermore, wider duties have been imposed upon both designer and principal contractor than under CDM Regulations1994, and all sectors of the construction industry need to be aware of the effect of the proposed Regulations and the significantly increased risk of enforcement action, including prosecutions by the HSE, for all members of the project team. The purpose of the Regulations is arguably to ensure that responsibility for health and safety is placed with those who are best placed to manage it and to simplify the legislation to make it easier to understand the roles, responsibilities and duties of the various members of the project team. In evaluating the changes introduced by the CDM Regulations 2006, the consequences thereof are demonstrated by the changes to the client’s responsibilities made on the basis that the client has the greatest control and influence over a construction project, though there is significant onus upon the client in the imposition of the obligation to appoint a competent co-ordinator and a principal contractor and the obligation to ensure that the co-ordinator performs his duties under the Regulations. The additional obligation is the duty to ensure that the designer, principal contractor and contractors are given sufficient time to plan and prepare for carrying out construction work. In relation to co-ordinator duties, it can be seen that the role of the co-ordinator is similar to that of the planning supervisor under CDM Regulations 1994, but with a number of important additional responsibilities which make the role of co-ordinator prominent in the project team. The co-ordinator’s role is intended to assist the client, designer and principal contractor to achieve better health and safety on site. The client’s obligation is demonstrated by the need to appoint the co-ordinator at an early stage in the project and before any design work or preparation for construction is carried out. The obligation of the co-ordinator is to “identify and extract” all the information to secure the health and safety of persons engaged in construction work and those who are liable to be affected by the way in which that construction work is carried out, and he is also required to identify and extract information to assist the client, the designer and the principal contractor to perform their duties under the Regulations arguably, the co-ordinator has a broader responsibility for design and is required to advise on the “suitability and compatibility” of designs and on any need for modification to those designs. The co-ordinator is also required to liaise with the principal contractor in relation to any design or design changes which affect the construction phase plan. The obligations upon the designer include the requirement to “eliminate” hazards which may give rise to risks to health and safety (e.g. not specifying the use of materials which could be hazardous, addressing design issues to minimise use of scaffolding or working at height). Furthermore, he must also take into account the risk to any person using a structure which it designs as a place of work in the future when it prepares or modifies its design. The obligations upon the principal contractor includes the obligation obliged to ensure that every contractor is given sufficient information to carry out its obligations under the regulations and to allow the contractor to carry out the work safely. He must ensure that every worker carrying out construction work is provided with site induction and any further information and training to ensure that a particular element of work is carried out without unnecessary risk to health and safety. There is also an obligation that there is co-operation, and duty is imposed upon everyone covered by the CDM Regulations 2006 to co-operate with each other and to seek the co-operation of others involved in any project involving construction work to enable each party to meet their obligations under the Regulations. Criticisms of the attempt of the HSC to adapt the original Regulations include the argument that the industry’s record in focusing upon the safety rules as opposed to the paper trail has been poor, and that therefore as demonstrated by the ten year record in adopting the CDM Regulations 1994, the record of the industry in reaping the benefits from such changes are not good. It has been argued that despite the fact that implementation of such rules should be simple, as it merely relates to managing projects from concept to completion, ensuring that there are adequate resources and sufficient time, and that health and safety standards are integrated into all levels of project management and the benefits demonstrated to be ensured as a result, the industry has always chosen to focus upon the costs and the unnecessary paperwork, with a view to ignoring these benefits. Other criticisms include the argument that the CDM Regulations 2006 do not go far enough in addressing the underlying causes of the industry’s health and safety record, argued by some sectors as being unacceptable. It has been argued that merely replacing a paper trail system with a system that focuses upon co-operation and management is not going to change much in the statistics regarding health and safety, as in many cases the designers argue that the contractors do not understand their design solutions, and contractors argue that designers do not understand how buildings are built. It is argued that although it is hoped that the planning supervisor can override these problems by bridging the gap, often they cannot because of inadequate fees, lack of authority or a lack of skill. Therefore, the system of ‘co-operation’ would not work because the more duties are imposed, the more unclear each individual duty appears to be. It has been acknowledged that the CDM Regulations 2006 could improve matters to some degree in relation to the need for training and debate to increase health and safety awareness, but an alternative solution has been suggested in which the clients procuring the projects should be made ultimately responsible for health and safety issues, as the client is in the ideal position to do so. In this instance, it has been considered that the duties delegated to the client under the CDM Regulations 2006 are vague and relate to matters such as the provision of information. It is therefore argued that there cannot be a significant change of the improvement and management of risk until clients in at least the public and commercial sectors are given more direct responsibility for ensuring that projects are carried out with regard to the safety standards. In ensuring this, reference is made to the need for civil and criminal sanctions. In conclusion, the proposals made by the HSC are merely an attempt to address many of the main problems of the current Regulations, but as the HSC is willing to admit, they do not deal with all the issues, and are intended to be a starting point, to encourage and facilitate discussion by means of responses from members of the construction industry.

The delay in submitting responses by the prescribed deadline has not in theory affected the fact that the new Regulations are due to be implemented in October 2006.It can be argued that contrary to the criticisms levelled at CDM Regulations2006, the responsibilities of the client have been increased to an appropriate degree, and that in a fair and proportionate manner appropriate obligations have also been placed upon other participants in a project. It appears that even so the ultimate onus is upon the client to ensure that a planning supervisor is employed with the correct skill and experience to ensure smooth running of the project and to effective address the concerns regarding management and risk.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Design and Management Essay Example. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Modern Methods Essay Online for Free

Introduction

Modern Methods of construction (MMC) consist of a range of techniques aimed at improving efficiency in construction. There is currently a serious shortage of homes in the UK. Mainly as a result of too few homes for sale being built, prices have been forced up to unaffordable levels. It is not possible for many people on average incomes to buy even a cheaper home. The shortage of homes for rent is causing still greater problems for people on low incomes. Housing waiting lists have lengthened, resulting in more overcrowding and sharing and more homeless families than ever in temporary accommodation. There is an urgent need for new homes – to make it possible for young families to buy a home, for essential workers in key public services to be able to afford somewhere to live, and for people on low incomes to have a home to rent. The government are looking to MMC to solve this problem by creating affordable homes quickly, and in 2004 set targets to add an extra 120 000 homes to the housing stock every year for the next ten years. The government's social housing funding body, The Housing Cooperation, has set a target that at least 25% of every new social housing development has to be built using MMC techniques. A shortage of housing in the UK however is by no means a new problem. We've been in similar situations before, and looked for similar answers. Many solutions of the past have, in the long-term, failed. The idea that Modern Methods of Construction could address a low cost housing issue has been used before. Shortly after the First World War and the passing of a series of housing acts from 1919 the government became concerned at the high cost of 'working class' housing. In 1924 a committee on New Methods of House Construction (Later to become Modern Methods of construction (MMC)) was set up which produced a series of reports, which among other things recommended that they wanted to see 'what may be called factory production of houses' In the middle of the Second World War, a mission sent to study systems in America urged the wholesale reorganisation of the British building industry; among many other specific points it recommended
  • Simplification of building design for greater standardisation and mechanisation of constructional work
  • Much more use of factory produced units and assemblies
55 years later in1998, Egan, in his report 'Rethinking Construction', recommended exactly the same change of direction. So what went wrong? And has the industry yet listened? Modern methods of Construction is the government's initiative to push firms to look for new technologies as well as the government doing its own research, this is clearly a big problem. The Office of the Deputy Prime Minister defines modern methods of construction as a process to produce more, better quality homes in less time. The Office of the Deputy Prime Minister also offers grants to firms to help them develop new methods, yet despite all this, there is still a problem. The UK is, again, in the middle of a housing crisis.

The Housing crisis

Merseyside housing renewal bosses are considering the use of flat pack Boklok housing to try to solve the problem of affordable housing in Merseyside which is of particular interest to me as it is in this area, my immediate concern with this project is whether the housing will actually be 'affordable' House factory – there are currently over 30 house factories in the UK, I will look at Westbury Homes Space4 factory near Birmingham which opened in 2001 Onsite house factory. Despite there being many house factories in the UK none of them are quite the same as the on-site house factories being used in the US, I plan to see if these types of factories could be used in the UK Problems in the past – quality has always suffered, aesthetics too Modern Methods of Construction (MMC) The Office of the Deputy Prime Minister defines modern methods of construction as a process to produce more, better quality homes in less time. Post war pre fabricated housing failure There is a current housing crisis Volumetric: involves the manufacture of three-dimensional units in factory conditions for delivery to Site. Some units are delivered with all internal and external finishes and services installed. Panellised: Flat panel units are produced in a factory and assembled on site. These may be 'open' panels or frames to which services, insulation and internal and external cladding is fixed on site, of fully-furnished panels containing more factory fabrication. Hybrid: A combination of panellised and volumetric units typically with more highly serviced and repeatable elements (such as bathrooms) supplied as 'pods'. Subassemblies and components: Construction methods that incorporate factory-made subassemblies, such as floor cassettes or precise concrete foundations, within otherwise traditional structures can also be classified as MMC. Non-off-site: Not all MMC's are factory based. Some, such as those employing lightweight concrete and 'thin-joint' mortar construction, are site based. Prefabricated housing has been used in the UK during periods of high demand, such as after the world wars and during the slum clearances of the 1960s. In total about 1 million prefabricated homes were built during the 20th century, many of which were designed to be temporary. However, problems arose over the quality of building materials and poor workmanship, leading to negative public attitudes towards prefabrication. In Japan 40% of new housing uses MMC. In other European countries there is also much greater use of MMC, particularly in Scandinavia and Germany. Indeed, some house building companies in Europe have started to export their houses to the UK The reasons for greater use of MMC in these countries are uncertain, but suggestions have included: 3
  • In colder climates the building season is short due to bad weather
  • Use of MMC allows quick construction.
  • MMC building materials, such as timber, are more readily available.
  • There is a greater tradition of self build housing. MMC appeals because faster construction reduces disruption to neighbours and allows earlier occupancy.
  • There are cultural preferences for certain house styles, e.g. timber frame in Scandinavia.

Issues surrounding MMC

While the Government is keen to encourage use of MMC for house building, research is still ongoing to assess its benefits. Issues arise over the cost of MMC; the industry capacity; its environmental benefits; the quality of such housing; public acceptance; and planning and building regulations. These questions are considered below.

Cost

Although some house builders argue that MMC is less expensive than traditional methods, industry sources indicate increased costs of around 7-10%. Reasons for the higher costs are difficult to discern because most project financial information is commercially confidential, and traditional masonry building costs vary widely too. It may be that the costs appear high because some benefits of using MMC, such as better quality housing and fewer accidents, are not obviously reflected in project accounts. MMC housing is faster to build, reducing on-site construction time by up to 50%, and thus reducing labour costs. Quicker construction is an extra benefit for builders of apartments (because viewing often starts only once all flats are finished), and for Housing Associations, who receive rent earlier. However, it is less important for private house builders as they rarely sell all the properties on a new development at once. An additional consideration is that the majority of factory overhead costs, e.g. labour, are fixed regardless of output. In contrast, site-based construction costs are only incurred if building is taking place. It is therefore less easy with MMC to respond to fluctuating demand.

Industry capacity

Industry capacity may be a barrier to increasing the number of houses built using MMC. Difficulties fall into two categories: a shortage of skills, and the factory capacity to manufacture parts.

Revisions to the Building Regulations

Building Regulations have been a major influence in the design specification for housing. They have been used by the Government to drive up standards and as the need for more sustainable buildings has increased, two of the regulations have been significantly revised which has had a large impact on construction methods.
  • Part L is concerned with the conservation of fuel and power.
  • Part E is concerned with resistance to the passage of sound, which is becoming more important as dwelling densities increase.
It is not just the improvement in the standards themselves that is exercising the minds of builders but that some aspects of the building's performance (i.e. air tightness and sound resistance) will now be tested post construction. If the building falls short, expensive remedial work will have to be carried out. Building performance in these areas is not just dependent on design detail, but also on the repeatability and consistency of good quality construction, aspects that lend themselves to the use of MMC.

Barriers to the use of MMC in housing

In a major survey of the top 100 house builders[8], the following factors were identified as being significant barriers to the introduction of MMC. They are summarised in Box 3 and discussed below in order of importance.

Capital costs

MMC are perceived as being more expensive than traditional methods with economies of scale being hard to achieve. 68% of housebuilders said that this was a barrier to the introduction of MMC. The National Audit Office (NAO)[9] reported that, for Registered Social Landlords (RSLs), open panel systems had a similar cost to traditional methods, but that hybrid and volumetric methods were slightly more expensive. To come to this conclusion, they took into account the following advantages: earlier rental income streams, the Social Housing Grant being drawn down earlier (thereby reducing borrowing and interest payments), reduced defects and reduced inspection. Some of these advantages would also benefit private developers. The NAO estimated that as the market matured the cost of building elements could be reduced by 15% which would close the gap in costs between traditional build and volumetric/hybrid MMC. This appears obtainable, but is more likely to occur if developers and RSLs partner with manufacturers so that they can have the assurance of the long-term viability of the MMC market. This will enable investment in finding ways of reducing costs through product and process development. Costs to the developer are also likely to reduce over time as developers become more familiar with MMC and are able to increase the efficiency of on-site trades as a result.

Concern over interfaces

This covers the interfaces (joints) of MMC to traditional build (eg how to fit roof trusses to a steel-frame house) and between different MMC systems (eg between a steel-frame house and a panellised timber-roof systems). This is a genuine concern that must be dealt with head-on. There are of course no reasons why interfaces should be more difficult than with traditional construction techniques. They are merely different and this needs to be planned for.

Early design freeze

MMC does require an early design freeze (when the details of the dwelling are set and cannot be altered) in comparison with traditional build. The timing of the design freeze will depend on the manufacturer's lead times and this is in part to do with manufacturing capacity. Although MMC providers should do all that they can to minimise their lead times and to build in flexibility, it is likely that users will always experience this problem to some extent.

Planning

The constraint of planning on MMC may be perceived rather than actual. Planners, quite rightly, are keen to make sure that neighbourhoods do not all look the same. Some people's perception of factory-produced housing is of lines of identical houses and clearly this should be avoided. The introduction of CADCAM techniques makes variation of MMC products relatively simple to achieve, although volumetric units will always have some constraints by their nature. Having said that, the planners often want to see changes to storey heights, window design and window layout. These can sometimes be agreed at a late stage in the planning application process and can result in extending the factory lead times through:
  • Delaying the start of the MMC design process, which has to be completed before the MMC product can be produced in the factory.
  • Delaying the purchase of the fenestration, which is often on long lead times. Where the windows and doors are installed in the MMC product in the factory, the production is either delayed or the product has to be shipped without the fenestration being installed.
In traditional build, windows are fitted much later in the build process and hence their delayed specification is more easily accommodated.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Modern Methods Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

College Essay Topics to Write about Adopting a Child

Discrimination of Single Adults in the Adoption Process: An Interdisciplinary Approach

Introduction

Even though it is legal in all 50 states for a single adult to adopt a child, there is still a negative attitude on placing adoptee children with single adults in the adoption process. This problem exists due to the fact that millions of children remain in the adoption system waiting to be adopted, despite the fact that there are numerous suitable single adults wanting to adopt these children. Since the adoption process is made more difficult for single adults due to discrimination, many children remain without a home. There are a large amount of willing single adults in the U.S. that are more than willing to adopt, love and care for the unwanted children in the adoption system. The adoption process is made more difficult for single adults because there is still the common belief that "two heads are better than one", and that children need to be placed in two parent homes rather than with single adults. If more children in the adoption system can be placed with eligible and loving single adults, then they will have a better chance of having a more stable and successful life. The discrimination that single parents experience when attempting to adopt an unwanted child requires multiple perspectives in order to be fully discussed. The reason that this is an interdisciplinary problem is because the discrimination of single adults in the adoption process is "too broad and complex to be dealt with adequately by a single discipline or profession (Repko, 2005). The unwanted children in the adoption system are a huge societal problem that needs to be addressed. It is especially a problem when there a people out there that want to take care of these children. An interdisciplinary approach also needs to be taken because there is not one area or subject that can provide a sufficient solution to this social problem. The first discipline that will give us a better understanding of this complex social problem would be the Sociology. According to the Journal of the American Planning Association, the structure of family has changed over the last 40 years due to several factors such as, the rising divorce rate, the increase in cohabitating couples and rising unemployment rates. The nuclear family is no longer the norm and many families are headed by single parents. These factors alone should make the adoption process fair and more acceptable when it comes to single adult homes versus two-parent homes. The next discipline that can give us a better perspective on the discrimination of single adults in the adoption process would be Economics. If single adults were considered as equal as two parent families in the adoption process then more children can be put into more homes and the financial burden on the state will be greatly reduced. According to the U.S. Department of Labor it is estimated that it cost $124,000- $170,000 to raise a child from birth to age 18 depending on the child. According to the National Council for Adoption (NCFA), as of 1997 about 100,000 children were in need of a home. That is approximately 2 billion dollars that the government has to pay to care for these unwanted children. If more single adults were allowed to adopt, then that cost can be greatly reduced. The third discipline that will help in addressing this problem will be Psychology. Children in need of adoption will have a better chance of psychologically wellbeing if they are out in a stable home, even if it is the home of a single adult, rather than them staying in the foster care system waiting on a two-parent home. There is this common belief that "two heads are better than one" when it comes to raising a child, but that may not necessarily be true. A child may have just as equal as a chance of psychological wellbeing in a single adult home as they would in a two-parent home. Since the very beginning with the very first adoption laws, there have been laws in most states that allow single parents to adopt according to the American Adoption Project. With single parents being eligible to adopt legally there was a negative attitude geared towards single adults in the adoption process especially at the beginning of the twentieth century. During this time period it was stigmatic to be a single parent whether the child was born out of wedlock or if a single adult was attempting to adopt. According to The Adoption History Project it wasn't until 1965 that the Los Angeles Bureau of Adoptions made the first organized effort to enlist single parents to adopt children. (www.uoregon.edu/~adoption/topics/singleparentadoptions.htm). Also according to The Adoption History Project, not only has adoption by single adults has been a growing trend since the 1970's but approximately one-third of children adopted from the public foster care system and one-quarter of all children with special needs are adopted by single individuals today, but many fewer single adults adopt fewer singles adopt healthy infants domestically or internationally. The purpose of this paper is to bring to light the ongoing bias that occurs against the numerous amounts of single adults pursuing adoption and hopefully bring an end to the bias against the single adults who want to nurture and provide a loving home for the unwanted children in the foster care system. With 89.6 million singles heading over half of America's households, according to the 2006 US Census, there should be more have just as equal of an opportunity to adopt a child in need of a home as anyone else.

Background

Discrimination of single adults in the adoption process has a negative impact not only on the children that are in dire need of stable and loving homes, but discrimination of single adults in the adoption process also has a negative impact on the single, potential parents that are ready and willing to provide a home for children that are unwanted by the rest of society. The problem with discriminating against single adults in the adoption process not only alienates a major population in America, but the children in need have a decreased chance at a stable home and end up waiting in the system if no one else adopts them. As of 2005 there were over 513,000 children in the U.S. that were in some form of foster care. Of those 513,000 children that were in foster care, 114,000, over half being male, were waiting to be adopted; meaning the parental rights of their biological parents had been terminated. Almost 700 of these children were runaways, and the rest were divided amongst government institutions, and foster homes. 23% of the children that were waiting to be adopted had been waiting in the foster care system since they were infants. (Adoption and Foster Care Analysis and Reporting System, 2005) With two-parent homes being the preference for an adoptee rather over single parents, many of these children age out of the adoption system without ever being placed in a permanent home. Nearly 20,000 children each year "aged out" of the foster care system or become a legal adults when they turn 18 and are no longer in the care of the foster care system. With these children coming from abusive families, without knowing where they came from at all or without the stability that they need as a child, they can end up becoming unstable adults which can have a negative impact on society. They may not get the help that they need to overcome their unfortunate circumstance, and therefore more likely not to experience stable adulthood also. According to a study conducted on foster children aged out of the system, Aging Out of the Foster Care System: Challenges and Opportunities for the State of Michigan: Young adults out of foster care are 51 percent more likely to be unemployed, 27 percent more likely to be incarcerated, and 42 percent more likely to be teenage parents, and 25 percent more likely to be homeless. Within four years, 60 percent of them will have had a child (Anderson, 2003) With the rising numbers of children in the foster care system, the problem of youth ageing out of the system and not succeeding in life will only become worse if nothing is done about it (Anderson, 2003). With them being at a disadvantage during childhood and growing up to a disadvantage in adulthood, these factors can a huge negative impact on society. They may need to be placed on welfare due their higher chance of being unemployed, which will cost the government and taxpayers even more money in addition to the cost of raising them as children. It also cost money to have them in prison, and support them if they become teenage parents. Making the adoption process fair for single adults increases the likelihood of giving more children in foster care a better childhood, a chance at a successful adulthood, and easing the financial burden on the U.S. Government and its taxpayers. Giving qualified single adults the opportunity to give these children a better future and loving home and have a positive impact on all of society. With more stable adults coming from stable homes, this decreases the chances of unemployment, teenage pregnancy, and imprisonment. Imagine growing up in an abusive household or being given up as a baby and not knowing where you came from and being placed in foster care or adoption facility. You may be placed in and out of different foster families throughout your life, but never the permanent and loving home that you need. Some of the foster families you have lived with may have been sufficient, other foster homes have had abusive foster parents, or other children in their care may have abused you also. You eventually turn 18, a legal adult, and are told to gather all of your belongings so that you can leave. Imagine being forced out of the only home you knew, without knowing a stable home or being taught the basic skills of surviving in the everyday world. This process happens to over 20,000 adults coming out of the foster care system all over the U.S. It is often wondered why these single adults would want to tie themselves down with children, let alone someone else's child. It is also wondered why risk adopting a child that comes from an abusive home and has a risk of mental health problems, or why go through with the difficult process as a single adult by competing with two-parent families to adopt a child. Single adults may be single by no fault of their own or they may choose to be single by choice. Either way, a single adult have the same needs and urges to nurture a child so they pursue parenthood just like any other adult. Single adults that pursue adoption want to love and provide a home for the unwanted children in foster care, even the ones with special needs. It is estimated that 25% of the adoption of children with special needs, are adopted by single adults (Prowler, 1990). Not only do single adults have to endure negativity to adopt a child from adoption agencies, they may endure criticism from the people that are closest to them. Family and friends of these single adults that are attempting to adopt can be discouraging by telling them to get married first or by telling them that they cannot raise a child on their own. For many singles, family and friends maybe the biggest obstacle that you have to overcome before even beginning adoption procedures (Prowler, 1990). She also states that single men may have it even tougher when it comes to overcoming obstacles. Their motives are highly questioned and they may get asked intimate questions about their sexuality and their reasoning behind wanting to adopt a child as a single man. The disciplines that are used to explain this complex, real world problem are Sociology, Economics, and Psychology. Sociology is one of the most important disciplines that will be used to address the problem of discrimination of single adults in the adoption process because the family structure in America has drastically changed the this discipline helps to address this fact. Sociology not only deals with the individual, it deals with family structure also. The next discipline that is used to address this complex issue would be Economics. Not allowing eligible single adults adopt fairly is hurting the American society financially, and the Economic discipline helps to address this issue. Sociology and Economics are discussed first because they are the more important of all three of the disciplines that are discussed and they have the biggest impact on the groups that are being discussed. Although Sociology and Economics are the more important disciplines, the complex problem of the discrimination of single adults in the adoption process cannot be fully addressed without discussing the discipline of Psychology, which discusses the mental well-being of the children that are in the foster care system. In order to have a better understanding of the complex issue of discrimination of single adults in the adoption process, we must be able to make use of the interdisciplinary process in order to have a good understanding of this issue. For this interdisciplinary problem , of the different models that can be used to address the problem, the comprehensive model will be used by giving the information, facts, and conclusion from each discipline in order to fully address the complex problem of discrimination against single adults in the adoption process (Repko, 2005).

References

U.S. Singles: The New Nuclear Family. (2007, May 30). Marketing Charts. Retrieved February 9, 2008, from https://www.marketingcharts.com/television/us-singles-the-new-nuclear-family-490. Ellewood, D. (1993). The Changing Structure of American Families. Journal of the American Planning Association (27) 1, 45-47. Retrieved February 14, 2007, from Academic Search Complete Database. Economics Anderson, G. (2003) Aging Out of the Foster Care System: Challenges and Opportunities for the State of Michigan. https://www.ippsr.msu.edu/Publications/ARFosterCare.pdf. Psychology Additional Sources Repko, A. (2005). Interdisciplinary Practice: A Student Guide to Research and Writing. Boston, MA: Pearson Custom Publishing. Prowler, M (1990). Single Parent Adoption: What You Need to Know. National Adoption Center. Retrieved January 26, 2008, https://library.adoption.com/single-parent- Adoption. Adoption and Foster Care Analysis and Reporting System. (2005) The AFCARS Report. www.acf.hhs.gov/programs/cb.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

College essay topics to write about Adopting a Child. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Cellular Networks Example for Free

Introduction

Computers and computer networks have changed the way in which we live, run our lives, communicate with each other and the way we work and produce what makes every commercial organisation function and reach success within its field, and in the same time, continue on the path of that success. The computers as stand-alone machines, or as separated ones, are nothing more than advanced computing machines, but what was required in reality is a way to link all the computers with each other and to allow users to have simultaneous access to databases and information; and this is why networks had to be created. Tanenbaum (2003, p.2) explains this fact by stating that “The merging of computers and communications has had a profound influence on the way computer systems are organized. The concept of the ‘computer centre' as a room with a large computer to which users bring their work for processing is now totally obsolete. The old model of a single computer serving all of the organization's computational needs has been replaced by one in which a large number of separate but interconnected computers do the job. These systems are called computer networks.” The main principle behind Computer networking is the communication between two or more computer systems. Computers within a network might be close to one another (such as the case with Bluetooth for example) or hundreds of kilometres away from each other (through the Internet). The first important step in this field came in 1984, when a completely digitalised, circuit-switched telephony system was introduced; this system was called ISDN; which stands for Integrated Services Digital Network for voice and non-voice data. After that, BellCore started developing the standard for the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET), and by the end of the 1980's, Local Area Networks (LAN) appeared as effective method of transferring data between a number of local computers, which led telephone companies replaces all its analogue multiplexing with digital multiplexing. But it is also essential to point out the element of the Internet; this international linked network, composed of servers and clients all over the world, encouraged the changes in both information technology and mobile computing, and this is why we find most of the indications, whenever we face a new product or application, referring to its characteristics in what concerns wireless connection, Bluetooth link, infrared, and much more. Raidl (2003, p.199) states that “mobile cellular networks are by far the most common of all public wireless communication systems. One of the basic principles is to re-use radio resources after a certain distance.” Walters and Kritzinger (2004) refer to the fact that mobile technology has turned to become one of the fastest, if not the fastest, growing field in the telecommunications industry. To give a clearer idea about the change brought to the world and to every one of us, we can refer to the comments of Furht and Ilyas (2003), as they state that “just a few years ago, the only way to access the Internet and the Web was by using wireline desktop and laptop computers. Today, however, users are traveling between corporate offices and customer sites, and there is a great need to access the Internet through wireless devices. The wireless revolution started with wireless phones and continued with Web phones and wireless handheld devices that can access the Internet”

Types of network

Computer networks can vary according to the purpose for which they were created and depending on the area they are supposed to cover geographically. Computer networks can be one of the following: 1) LAN (Local Area Network) is “a small interconnection infrastructure that typically uses a shared transmission medium. Because of such factors as the volume of traffic, the level of security, and cost, the network structure in a local area network can be significantly different from that for a wide area network.” And “LAN is used for communications in a small community in which resources, such as printers, software, and servers, are shared. Each device connected to a LAN has a unique address. Two or more LANs of the same type can also be connected to forward data frames among multiple users of other local area networks” (Mir, 2007, p.102). 2) WAN (Wide Area Network) is “spans a large geographical area, often a country or continent. It contains a collection of machines intended for running user (i.e., application) programs” (Tanenbaum, 2003, p.19). 3) CAN (Campus Area Networks) “are the enterprise networks that serve number of related structure, as in a large company or a college campus.” Lehtinen, Gangemi, Gangemi Sr, and Russel, 2006, p.182). 4) MAN (Metropolitan Area Network) which “covers a city. The best-known example of a MAN is the cable television network available in many cities” (Tanenbaum, p.18). 5) HAN (Home Area Network) is “the connection of a number of devices and terminals in the home on to one or more networks which are themselves connected in such a way that digital information and content can be passed between devices and any access ‘pipe' to the home” (Turnbull & Garrett, 2003, p.46).

Cellular networks

In their description of the first cellular radio networks in history, Walters and Kritzinger (2004) state that “in 1946, the first car-based telephone was set up in St. Louis, Missouri, USA. The system used a single radio transmitter on top of a tall building. A single channel was used, therefore requiring a button to be pushed to talk, and released to listen. This half duplex system is still used by modern day CB radio systems utilized by police and taxi operators. In the 1960s, the system was improved to a two-channel system, called the improved mobile telephone system (IMTS)... Cellular radio systems, implemented for the first time in the advanced mobile phone system (AMPS), support more users by allowing reuse of frequencies. AMPS is an analogue system, and is part of first generation cellular radio systems.” Even though it has become one of the most common and popular means of communication between people in the last years, cellular networks still have no specific definition; “Cellular communications has experienced explosive growth in the past two decades. Today millions of people around the world use cellular phones. Cellular phones allow a person to make or receive a call from almost anywhere. Likewise, a person is allowed to continue the phone conversation while on the move. Cellular communications is supported by an infrastructure called a cellular network, which integrates cellular phones into the public switched telephone network” (Zhang and Stojmenovic, 2005, p.654). This difficulty in finding a definition is due to the fact that there are different technologies and networking methods used within the frame of cellular networks. Frantz and Carley (2005, p.5) explain that “cellular networks are a distinct and important network topology. Although there is a growing body of work referring to cellular networks, there is no complete formal definition. However, there are several papers that seek to describe characteristics of cellular networks. Cellular networks are a critical topology to formally characterize, in part, as they are thought to be a common form for covert networks.” Yet, it is possible to find some kind of an explanation of such networks and how they operate: “Cellular networks use a networked array of transceiver base stations, each located in a cell to cover the networking services in a certain area. Each cell is assigned a small frequency band and is served by a base station. Neighbouring cells are assigned different frequencies to avoid interference. However, the transmitted power is low, and frequencies can be reused over cells separated by large distances” (Mir, 2006 p.42). A cellular network, for it to be considered a functional type of communication network, relies “on relatively short-range transmitter/ receiver (transceiver) base stations that serve small sections (or cells) of a larger service area. Mobile telephone users communicate by acquiring a frequency or time slot in the cell in which they are located. A master switching centre called the ‘mobile transport serving office' (MTSO) links calls between users in different cells and acts as a gateway to the PSTN” (Muller, 2003, p.50) Each cellular network is composed of what is can be referred to as Cells; which are defined by Frantz, and Carley, (2005) as “a distinct subgroup of actors within a larger cellular network. The presence of at least one cell is fundamental to a network's distinction of being cellular—without at least one cell, a network is not cellular. Empirically, a cell often consists of relatively few actors and has a distinct topology that is effortless to identify visually. The actors in a cell can be partitioned into two distinct but intertwined subgroups, namely the cell-core and the cell-periphery.” Muller (2003) explains that there are no specific sizes for cells within a cellular network, this is due to the fact that there are many factors that interfere in this element and according to the surrounding environment and obstacles can the cell's size be determined: “Cell boundaries are neither uniform nor constant. The usage density in the area, as well as the landscape, the presence of major sources of interference (e.g., power lines, buildings), and the location of competing carrier cells, contributes to the definition of cell size. Cellular boundaries change continuously, with no limit to the number of frequencies available for transmission of cellular calls in an area. As the density of cellular usage increases, individual cells are split to expand capacity. By dividing a service area into small cells with limited-range transceivers, each cellular system can reuse the same frequencies many times.” According to Muller (2003), a cellular network is composed also of a Master Switching Centre which “operates similar to a telephone central office and provides links to other offices. The switching centre supports trunk lines to the base stations that establish the cells in the service area." Another component is the transmission channels which are, in most cases, two kinds of channels; a control channel and a traffic channel. And, of course, to close the circle within this network, a cellular phone is needed; “cellular telephones incorporate a combination of multi-access digital communications technology and traditional telephone technology and are designed to appear to the user as familiar residential or business telephone equipment.” During their evolution and continuing enhancement, cellular networks went through consecutive levels of development; each of them added more power and functionality to the previous one. Zhang and Stojmenovic (2005, p.654) explain that cellular networks have had three stages that are called generations. The first of those generations is analogue in nature. Then, when more cellular phone subscribers needed to be connected and function simultaneously, digital TDMA (time division multiple access) and CDMA (code division multiple access) technologies appeared and were put to work; and this was the second stage or what is known as the second generation (2G) which was necessary in order to increase the capacity of the cellular network. “With digital technologies, digitized voice can be coded and encrypted. Therefore, the 2G cellular network is also more secure.” With the high importance of applications related to the Internet and their continuous growth, many users required more of the their cellular devices. Then the third generation (3G) arrived. 3G “integrates cellular phones into the Internet world by providing high speed packet-switching data transmission in addition to circuit-switching voice transmission. The 3G cellular networks have been deployed in some parts of Asia, Europe, and the United States since 2002 and will be widely deployed in the coming years.” There are some expectations regarding the future for what concerns the fourth generation wireless networks: “These will evolve towards an integrated system, which will produce a common packet-switched (possibly IP-based) platform for wireless systems, offering support for high-speed data applications and transparent integration with the wired networks” (Nicopolitidis, Obaidat, Papadimitriou and Pomportsis, 2003). Cellular networks make use of certain protocols in order to make communication easier between various entities within the limits of the network. A protocol of communication can be defined as a group of rules which correspond to messages that two or more entities communicate between each other within a network. Protocols used for cellular networks are included within the standard which is covering the service. The first and most popular standard for mobile phones is GSM (Global System for Mobile communications). Other standards are CDMA and TDMA. Another important point concerning cellular networks is what can be called Location Management, which is essential for the network to monitor every registered mobile station's location so that the mobile station can be able to connect to the network upon request. It is important to note the similarities between cellular networks and Wireless LANs, but it is also worthwhile noticing the differences between the two: “Goals for third-generation wireless communication, enunciated in the early 1990s by the International Telecommunications Union Task Group IMT-2000, focused on the first two criteria, bit rate and mobility. Third-generation systems should deliver 2 Mbps to stationary or slowly moving terminals, and at least 144 kbps to terminals moving at vehicular speeds. Meanwhile, WLAN development has confined itself to communications with low-mobility (stationary or slowly moving) terminals, and focused on high-speed data transmission. The relationship of bit rate to mobility in cellular and WLAN systems has been commonly represented in two dimensions” (Furht and Ilyas, 2003, p.33).

Wireless data applications

With the continuous growth of mobile devices, different services were created in order to widen the range of the functionality of those devices. For such devices to be able to use the newly offered services, specific types of applications had to be created and deployed or installed on the mobile device, may it be a cell-phone, PDA, or a notebook computer. “Wireless data services use a mix of terrestrial and satellite-based technologies to meet a wide variety of local (in building or campus settings), metropolitan, regional, national, and international communication needs... A number of wireless data applications, in fact, are being designed with fixed users in mind” (Office of Technology Assessment, 1995). To be able to understand how wireless data applications work, it is necessary to have a comprehensive view concerning their delivery methods; as a matter of fact, there are two main delivery methods: “There are two fundamental information delivery methods for wireless data applications: point-to-point access and broadcast. In point-to-point access, a logical channel is established between the client and the server. Queries are submitted to the server and results are returned to the client in much the same way as in a wired network. In broadcast, data are sent simultaneously to all users residing in the broadcast area. It is up to the client to select the data it wants” (Zomaya, 2002) Wireless data applications can be divided into two main groups: Messaging and Remote Access. “Messaging applications can generally tolerate low throughput and long transmission delays. Electronic mail (e-mail) often fits this category, but not always, messages with attached files may strain the capacity of wireless messaging networks,” then there is Remote access which is required to allow access to the resources and services of a network from outside the geographical barriers of the physical establishment of that network (Brodsky, 1997).

Conclusion

Throughout this paper, understanding the information presented within it fully, it is accurate to state that a cellular network is definable correctly by presenting the following: “We define a cellular network as a single-component and undirected network of actors and their relationships, strictly consisting entirely of actors who are members of a specific cell, as previously defined; thus a network in which all actors are a member of a cell. For a network to be considered cellular, these conditions must be met: (a) the ties making up the relations in the network may only be undirected, (b) the network consists of a single component, e.g., there are no isolate actors, and (c) the network consists solely of cell subgroups that are connected via spanning ties, e.g., there are no actor in the network who is not a member of a cell subgroup” (Frantz and Carley, 2005, p.10) As for wireless data applications, in 1997 Brodsky stated that if such application are to become widespread and popular exactly as the simple mobile phones were in the end of the 1990s, users should become “readily and reliably send and receive data over paging, cellular and PCs”. And as we can see today, that phase is exactly what we experience today; ten years after the author wrote those words.

Reference List

Brodsky, I. (1997). Wireless Computing: A Manager's Guide To Wireless Networking. New York, New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Furht, B. and Ilyas, M. (2003) Wireless Internet Handbook—Technologies, Standards, and Applications, Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press LLC. Frantz, T. and Carley, K. (2005) A Formal Characterization of Cellular Networks, CASOS Report, [Online] September. Available at: https://cos.cs.cmu.edu/publications/papers/CMU-ISRI-05-109.pdf Lehtinen, R., Gangemi, G. Gangemi, G Sr., and Russel, D. (2006) Computer Security Basics, Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly & Associates. Mir, N. (2007) Computer and Communication Networks, Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc. Muller, N. (2003) Wireless A to Z, New York, New York: The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Nicopolitidis, P., Obaidat, M., Papadimitriou, G. and Pomportsis, A. (2003) Wireless Networks, West Sussex, England: John Wiley & Sons Ltd. Office of Technology Assessment - Congress of the United States. (1995) Wireless technologies and the national information infrastructure. Washington, DC: DIANE Publishing. Raidl, G. (2003) Applications of Evolutionary Computing, Berlin, Germany: Springer. Tanenbaum, A. (2003) Computer Networks, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc. Turnbull, J. and Garrett, S. (2003) Broadband Applications and the Digital Home. Stevenage, United Kingdom: The Institution of Electrical Engineers. Walters, L. and Kritzinger, P. (2004) ‘Cellular Networks: Past, Present, and Future', Association for Computing Machinery [Online] Available at: https://www.acm.org/crossroads/xrds7-2/cellular.html Zhang, J. and Stojmenovic, I. (2005) Cellular networks, Handbook on Security (H. Bidgoli, ed.), Vol. I, Part 2, chapter 45, pp.654-663. Zomaya, A. (2002). Handbook of Wireless Networks and Mobile Computing. New York, New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Cellular Networks Example For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Bowlby’s Theory of Attachment Essay Online for Free

In the light of changes to the family since 1950 are Bowlbys ideas about care for young children still relevant today?

In this paper, Bowlby's theory of attachment and child care will be outlined along with additions from other theorists such as Rutter and Ainsworth. From this we will see how the evolution of the family unit since the 1950s has been affected by such theories along with welfare policy and social theorists which have influenced family life and childcare practices in the UK. Bowlby described attachment as the bond that develops between a baby and its primary caregiver. It is characterised by the interaction patterns which develop in order to fulfil the infants' needs and emotional development. Bowlby noted the apparent distress in children separated from their mothers in unusual circumstances e.g. hospitalisation. In studying the more abnormal and distressing situations he attempted to shed light on an understanding of normal emotional attachment development, and how a disruption could prove damaging to the child emotionally and through to adult maturation. Bowlby suggested that the presence of the mother was just as crucial to the baby as being supplied basic needs such as food. His conclusions led him to postulate that the distress at separation from the mother was universal in babies. Bowlby characterised this distress as following the pattern of infant protest, followed by despair and ending in eventual detachment. The term 'separation anxiety' was brought about echoing ethological survival techniques in which patterns of actions enable survival of young animals. Such ideas influenced Bowlby in postulating a significant period attachment of one to five years which was imperative historically to biological survival, and if they were not in place then emotional and intellectual problems would occur in adulthood. This can be seen as a rigid attitude and has played a large part in influencing childcare decisions through the establishment of a connection between maternal absence, child care (including institutional and foster care) and later developmental problems. Studies from Rutter and Ainsworth have agreed with an attachment principle but have developed it to include situational variables such as previous home life, relationships, depth of bonding and care and reasons and reactions of the caregiver in dealing with an absence and return situation that can have an effect on the child above any basic separation. The length of absence, quality of care giving within that absence and inherent flexibility and adaptability of infants as well as their capability to make multiple attachments all need to be taken into account within this area. During the 1940s Bowlby made a connection between the attachment of an infant and mother and the shaping of an infant's personality. From this an association was placed on the mother caring for the child instead of working. At this time welfare policies were focussed on a post war development of the family, and working freedoms afforded to women during the war were heavily curtailed as was war time nursery care. Popular policies suggested women should now be investing in their families as a duty. Thus if female workers were not being encouraged politically as an economic asset then child care policy provision was also diminished. Here Bowlby's ideas fuelled policy through popularising images of home based child care and family values by experts. Rutter later influenced changes through his findings of multiple attachment making in children - although stressed that continuity of attachment was important. He was in support of child day care as long as it was continuous and high quality, although a preference of parental care was suggested by Rutter. There is a difficulty in isolating variables which result in positive and negative attachments. Indeed some feminists argue that stay at home mothers are often at risk of harming their children through an inability to cope and lack of support from immediate or extended family. Associated with this argument is that of the risk from domestic violence which increases isolation and effects the development of the child - even if the primary caregiver is ever present. From the 1950s an increased development of the nuclear family has been argued to provide a duel function. In this the family is seen to provide close personal relationships and act as an economic strategy for development and to maintain stability and control. Such evolution of the family has been characterised by transience and isolation of family units from the extended family and community itself. A close knit extended family can provide more options for child care and support whereas otherwise external methods of care are needed. If maternal proximity with the under-fives is crucial then entire communities would be maladjusted by design and this clearly cannot be held across the board. Again the issue of consistency and quality over quantity of child care can be bought to view. Popular media along with welfare policies have in recent years sought to not only improve childcare and rearing practices, provide support, normalise differing household situations such as lone parent, and expansion and regulation of child day care provision. Feminist theory has been at the forefront of women's re- entry to work force as well as a normalisation of divorce and single parent or co-habiting (step) households. On the other hand the feminist push for women's employment rights has resulted in inevitable contradictions as women are pulled in both directions, and indeed even the act of having children at all is currently considered heavily in an economic light due to the increased cost of living and childcare fees. Nowadays we can see increased governmental intervention in support of the family in the form of lengthening maternity and paternity and parenting care rights, children's rights, tax credits, flexible working, child care and pre-school provisions and subsidies, and the importance of family environment and child security building in issues of fostering and child protection. Thus the family by whatever shape of form it may take in the UK is heavily affected by the economic requirements and government policy provision. It is now the norm for women to work as well as be responsible for child care and household upkeep. Subsequently it is the norm for mothers to be separated from babies before their first birthday due to monetary need - and often this has to be longer than desirable due to a cycle of economic need and high child care fees. Overall, I can conclude that Bowlby's ideas although outdated have persisted through the decades and still influence child rearing and day care decisions. It can be seen as persisting in governmental policy to this day for example, in maternity leave being extended to cover twelve months leave - Bowlby would surely support this move. In all Bowlby's ideas of attachment and primary parental care giving remain pervasive and are ingrained within the family unit in the UK, although an acknowledgement of multiple attachments and quality of child care are now highlighted over simply the primary care givers proximity.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Bowlby's Theory of Attachment Essay Online For Free. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Principles of Education Essay Example for College Students

Discuss Froebel's ideas about Play, and the Environments and Resources which support children's development. Reflect on the Value of Froebel's ideas today. Illustrate your answer with examples from your childhood and any observations you have of children at home or in an early years settings.

Introduction

Friedrich Froebal (1782-1852) was a German educator most famous for his insight into the importance of the early years of a child's life to their development and later life. Furthermore he also considered that the effect of early life extended beyond the educational achievement into health and society at large. Froebal created kindergartens (children's gardens) as he perceived a child's growth to be like a plant growing and thriving where the right conditions exist. Within the kindergartens he utilised his principles and practices, including experience of out of doors activities, as an important part of the educational practice. He developed a series of 'gifts' which are designed to be a gift in two senses: firstly in the sense of being given to the child as a gift and secondly as a gift of development. The gifts, which are learning tools, were planned to be age relevant and to encourage development and self-actualisation in the child (Provenzo, 2009) p88-89). The kindergarten and Froebal's approach have had a massive impact on early learning and still has relevance today.

Froebal's influence in the present day

The early years of life are vital to the overall development of a child. During this time the emotional parameters are learned together with ways to interact with others and learning through experiences (Sroufe, 1997 p.1-8). In order to maximise the benefit of this time correct stimulation and provision of tools/toys that will enable the child to explore and learn about themselves and the world around them are necessary. Froebal specifically devised his principles for ages 1-7. The Froebal approach involves the principles, pedagogy and environment. The principles take a holistic view of the individual child's progress and recognises their uniqueness, capacity and potential. In addition play is seen to be fundamental and important in the child's development. Part of the learning includes understanding, and working with, the place of humankind in the natural world. Finally the principles recognise the integrity of childhood and of the child as part of a family and of the community (Hermann, 1926 p.201-205). The pedagogy involves having knowledgeable and appropriately qualified professionals to provide skilled informed observation of the children and provide appropriate guidance and teaching. Key to the process of teaching is that is must reach the imaginative, creative, symbolic, linguistic, mathematical, musical, aesthetic, scientific, physical, social, moral, cultural and spiritual aspects of the child. This clearly shows how wide a range of stimulation is required. The child's development is not just the responsibility of the teachers and it is important that the parents/guardians of the child and their educators work harmoniously together to maintain a consistent approach. Play is central to the process and there needs to be a sense of purpose for the child in that play together with an understanding that the child must be viewed holistically as a thinking, feeling person. Encouragement is used rather than punishment to help the child to expand their self-confidence and autonomy. Play can also be used to help the child learn to be able work alone and also with others (Willinsky, 1990 p154-5) . The environment in which the child is placed will also have an important role in their development. Whilst the environment needs to be safe it must also encourage curiosity, stimulation and challenge. Indoor and outdoor activities widen the possible areas of learning and vary the environment providing interest and variety. Froebal also saw working in an environment that is integral to the community to be important in helping the child to be both independent and interdependent and to understand individuality and community and responsibility and freedom. These basic ideals were set out originally by Froebal in his 1826 book 'The Education of Man'. He viewed his own childhood with limited parental attention and remembered his loneliness and using this as his starting point he developed his ideals. He also drew on the knowledge of previous educators when developing his own system of education (Polito, 1996)(p. 161-173). This point may well need to be revisited now with the advent of computers and television programmes specifically aimed at young children. Research needs to be aimed at determining the effects of lack of face to face attention from parents and other adults at home and learning being 'handed over' to mechanical means. There would appear to be correlations between Froebal's situation and that of many children today. Lack of interaction with other children and a range of adults limits the possible range of learning situations and may create problems with social interaction later in life although research into this area needs to be conducted to fully understand the effects. Having only the TV or computer for entertainment will also serious limit the child's imagination through lack of personal interaction and physically being involved in the play. This may affect motor skills too through lack of use and a reduced range of movement. In my own childhood I was always encouraged to use inventive play and would create theatre sets with my friends and we would perform little puppet shows for our parents. This type of play involved a variety of concepts; craft work to create the sets, linguistic skills to write the plays, integrated play by playing with others and dexterity to use puppets. Froebal's methods are still valid today and can provide children with a wide range of experiences and instil in them curiosity and interest that can be built upon throughout life. Despite how long ago these principles were first developed they are still fully appropriate today perhaps because they relate to the core aspects of development leaving room for the method to be varied as necessary. The gifts such as gift 2 (a set of 3 blocks one square, one sphere and one cylinder) can be moved together with rods and strings to provide multiple possibilities for interactions. These forms introduce the child to geometry and also allow for free expression within individual play. Gift 2 was a form that so embodied Froebal's insights that it was used to create a granite construction over his grave (Froebal webn.d.) [online]. There are many toys available today that have similar possibilities and it is important that children are both allowed to play alone with these items but also that parents share play with them too to help with integrated play. One of the key elements within Froebal's thinking was the interaction with nature and the natural world. I remember when I was young that at school we had a wild garden at the rear of the playground and we had classes sitting in that area learning about plants and how they grew taking inspiration from what was growing around us. In current settings some schools are able to encourage children in their own school gardens. Whilst this is not appropriate for very small children their interest and excitement about the outside world can be begun by allowing them to play outside and introducing them to flora and fauna such as watching spring bulbs coming up. Many parents may also need assistance in this area as they have not had these experiences themselves and thus have difficulty in helping their children to develop in this way (Taylor, 2004 p.163-178) . It is, therefore, important that children have access to a variety of environments in order to have the opportunity to understand and learn about different settings. Froebal identified that children will have their own individual thoughts and understanding of the things around them and by interaction and role play develop their knowledge further. (Puckett, 2004 p. 45-6) . He described play as the work of children (Miller, 2009)(p.46-50). The current economic situation may have an impact on the money available to parents. However, children are able to benefit from fewer more appropriate 'ready-made' toys and the freedom to become inventive and create their own entertainment. Children will, for instance, often be more interested in the box something comes in and convert the box into a car or tank or dolls house. Such creative play will expand the child's abilities in many different areas (Robson, 2006 p. 39-55) f. The Government scheme 'Every Child Matters' recognises the importance of the early years of life and sets out a range of proposals to support children, parents and all those involved in the care and education of children (H.M. Government, 2003). Through this provision there is a wide range of information and guidance available that can assist in providing good, safe environments and appropriate resources to facilitate learning. This includes such resources as Early Years Learning and Development Literature Review (available as a free download) produced by the Government which contains a wealth of evidence based information to assist in all areas of child development (Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Family, 2009)

Conclusion

Froebal's vision was clear and detailed and still is equally valid today. The way in which it is expressed may have developed further from the original but the basic principles still hold true. The early years are vital to the overall development of a child so it is very important to provide the best environment and resources to facilitate learning. Most children will need to be able to continue with life-long learning to deal with the challenges presented in adult life so stimulating them early on to enjoy learning and creativity prepares them for their futures. Parents, carers and educators need to be working together in order to provide the best environment and resources for children and give them the very best start in life possible.

Bibliography

Froebal web. (n.d.). Second Gift. Retrieved March 13th, 2012, from Froebal Web an online resource: https://www.froebelweb.org/gifts/second.html H.M. Government. (2003). Every Child Matters. London: Government. Hermann, M. (1926, April). Froebel's Kindergarten and What It Means. The Irish Monthly, 54(634), 201-209. Puckett, M. B. (2004). Teaching Young Children An introduction to the early childhood profession. Canada: Delmar Learning. Robson, S. (2006). Developing thinking and understanding in young children. Oxford: Routledge. Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Family. (2009). Early Years Learning and Development - Literature Review. London: H.M. Government. Sroufe, L. A. (1997). Emotional Development : The Organization of Emotional Life in the Early Years. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Taylor, L. C. (2004). Academic Socialization: Understanding Parental Influences on Children's School-Related Development in the Early Years. Review of General Psychology, 8(3), 163–178. Willinsky, J. R. (1990). The Educational Legacy of Romanticism. Ontario: Wilfred Laurier University Press.

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Principles of Education Essay Example for College Students. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

Why have McDonald’s Sales been Declining?

Founded in the 1940s, McDonald’s has become the largest, the most successful and most well known fast-food chain in the world. When ranked amongst the rest of their industry competitors, McDonald’s are consistently ranked as the most valuable fast-food brand in the world as well as being in the top 10 of all the overall brands in the world . Achievements like this highlight the enormity of the firm when they are ranked amongst the likes of Apple, Google and Coca-Cola year after year (Forbes, 2015). Between 2003 and 2011, McDonald’s saw a rise in its value from $12 per share to $100 per share at its peak in 2011 (The Economist, 2015b). However, over the last 18 months, the firm’s dominance is not as apparent as it once was. With a fall in sales revenue and a more substantial challenge from other fast-food competitors, the question being asked is – why, after so long, is McDonald’s starting to falter and what can they do to solidify their top spot? This essay will argue that the main reason behind the decline in McDonald’s sales is the change in the social and cultural makeup of many of its consumers.

Whilst other factors will be highlighted through the use of a PEST analysis, this essay will argue that the main reason is a generational shift that McDonald’s has failed to keep up with and will ultimately offer recommendations that could potentially help the fast-food chain increase sales. The essay will primarily focus on ways to increase sales in the UK. The UK is home to over 1,200 McDonald’s restaurants. In recent years it has become the UK’s third largest fast-food chain behind the likes of Costa and Greggs (Armstrong, 2015). Despite sales increasing in the UK by 0.5%, worldwide, the firm saw a decrease of 1.8% in sales (Fortune Magazine, 2015). There are things that are out of the control of those in charge of UK operations such as food safety scares in Japan and China but there can be measures taken to increase sales so that it can offset the problems in other parts of the world (Fortune Magazine, 2015). All businesses, no matter the size of the company, or the scope of their operations, must consider the external environment they are operating in. Failure to do so can result in missed opportunities to maximise one’s profit-making or allows competitors to come into the market and control a significant portion of the market share (Worthington, 2009). PEST analysis (an acronym for Political, Economical, Social and Technological) is a tool used to examine the external environment to outline potential limitations in various aspects of a business’ operations. Anything that can hinder the ultimate aim for a company, to make money, needs to be a priority for any business on the behalf of their shareholders. The political environment analyses the political sphere and the way the it can have a direct effect on the way business operates (Worthington, 2009). This incorporates aspects such as the political system and its attitude to private enterprise; as well as legislation and regulation that governs the way firms operate at various levels from local government to international governance. The UK is a very business-friendly political system. The UK operates with some of the lowest corporation tax rates in the developed world with companies such as McDonald’s having to pay a rate of 20% as they earn over A£300,000 in profit and this to be cut further in the future to 18% (HMRC, 2015). With this being kept in mind, the UK political environment encourages enterprise and is therefore difficult to suggest that the political workings of the UK are contributing to the downward spiral of the company’s sales revenue and ultimately, limited actions the business could take within this environment to increase sales. A similar conclusion can be made of the economic environment. This environment focuses of the wider macroeconomic activity and the way it affects the way businesses operates (Worthington, 2009). This includes taxation in its various forms such as, in the UK, national insurance, income tax and corporation tax; the unemployment level, as higher unemployment means less demand for products due less money flowing through the economy, or interest rates.

The economic and political environments are closely interlinked and economics can dictate policy and policy can dictate. The economic crisis saw a rise in unemployment which has a knock-on effect on the ability for a business to generate revenue. However, growth in the economies of the highly developed nations has resulted in unemployment falling. As of April 2015, the UK unemployment rate stood at 5.6% (Eurostat, 2015). Therefore despite the fact that the macro- and microeconomic climate is improving, the revenue of McDonald still falls suggesting that the reason behind it is not economic. The aim of this essay is to argue that the main reason for McDonald’s recent failings is due to its neglect in adapting to the current social and, by extension, technological environments.

The social environment is concerned with the social and cultural aspects that can affect a way a business operates and technological environment is concerned with the use of modern day technology to maximise opportunities, for example, cheaper methods of production or more efficient ways of delivering a service or product (Worthington, 2009). Regardless of the industry, a business needs to understand the societal norms of the area they operate. For example, a company like McDonalds should not sell beef burgers in a country like India, where the Hindu population does not eat beef. Whilst it appears that McDonald’s has catered for the various social differences in the variety of countries it operates in, on the surface level at the very least, the company has failed to keep up with cultural changes in its base – the West. Businesses maximise their sales through segmentation. Segmentation is the process where companies focus their marketing by segmenting the market into small groups of shared traits such as demographics, age, gender and occupation.

Segmenting the market has no merit in itself; a business needs to understand the consumer behaviour of that particular segment. Consumer behaviour entails all the activities that are normally associated with the purchasing of a product by examining why people buy what they buy and not just what they buy (Kardes et al, 2014). McDonald’s have been caught between two different marketing methods – aiming to the lower end of the market and directly competing with the likes of Burger King and attempting to aim for the higher-end fast-food restaurants such as Chipotle, Wahaca and Five Guys; who are a little more expensive but are growing in popularity. There has been a growth in the demand for the upmarket, fast-food chains due to their key selling point being high quality food with the option to customise one’s dish (The Economist, 2015b). The rise in the high -end fast-food chains can be attributed to the rise of a particular segment – Generation Y or otherwise known as the ‘Millennials’. Generation Y, is the term that refers to individuals born after 1982 and grew up in a post-Cold War age, through unprecedented prosperity, and throughout the advent of the internet and globalisation. Over the last decade, they have begun to make up the majority of the market (Strauss & Howe., 2009). As a result of the age Millennials grew up in, they are less susceptible to traditional marketing techniques and are much more cynical in what a brand has to offer them. Gray (2015) believes that whilst Generation Y are still very aware of the marketing techniques but because they have been targets to it at various levels for their entire life, as opposed to many individuals from Generation X, Millenials are much more desensitised to it. They no longer accept products on face value, but attach a greater concern for being valued as a customer.

Jobber (2013) writes that we have entered into a New Marketing Era where the customer is the centre of the marketing mix and attempting to build a long-term relationship with the customer as opposed to previous era in which Generation X were part of. A study into Millennial consumer loyalty found that Millennials will often choose where to shop based on the quality of the product or service and being rewarded for their loyalty. This study found that 74% of participants were more likely to choose a brand that offers a reward or loyalty programme (Ferguson, 2012). This can be seen amongst the fast-food chains such as Starbucks, Costa and Nando’s where consumers are rewarded through loyalty cards or apps that can be redeemed for free products and discount. Many argue that McDonald’s should head back to its roots and continue to focus on the lower end of the market with the likes of Burger King. However, with this increasing trend in upmarket food-chains, McDonald’s should focus on this market if they hope to increase sales. Martin (2002) found that one third of Millennials in the US are from an ethnic minority which brings about a global mix-and-match culture amongst Millennials resulting in a greater demand for culturally diverse foods. One of the key selling points of chains like Chipotle or Five Guys is the ability to build your own dish.

With a combination of ingredients, these restaurants offer customers a chance to create something that matches their taste as much as possible. McDonald’s in Australia is trailing a new ‘Create Your Taste’ menu, where customers have the ability to create their own gourmet burger from a selection of ingredients through a digital kiosk and have it delivered to their table (Macleod, 2014). A trial like this automatically combines that customisation element that many of the Generation Y individuals enjoy so much as well as making use of the modern day technology and is therefore the first thing that McDonald’s in the UK should introduce to increase sales. Due to the fact that many of these restaurants such as Five Guys are relatively expensive compared to the likes of Burger King and KFC means that it is not an economic issue; consumers are willing to pay if they feel the quality is appropriate and they are valued. This means that McDonald’s could charge more for their customisable burgers and further increase revenue. The greatest innovation over the last 20 years has been the advent of the internet and many companies have made it their priority to make use of it to expand their business opportunities. When it comes to fast-food restaurants, the opportunity to expand on the internet is limited due to the nature of the industry. However, through the introduction of smartphones and smartphone applications, a number of fast-food chains are utilising these to allow a smoother and more convenient experience for their consumers.

For instance, Nando’s in the UK uses an application that allows customers to pre-order their meal for it to be ready for collection. It means that commuters on their way home from work can order their food whilst mid-journey and their meal will be ready to be collected for take-way when they have arrived at their local Nando’s restaurant. Therefore a second recommendation that would help increase the sales in the UK for McDonald’s would be to increasingly utilise the technology available to them.

Ferguson’s study into Millennial consumer loyalty (2012) found that 59% of Millennials use smartphones and with the increasing availability of smartphones at a more affordable price since 2012, it can be assumed, that the figure in 2015 is greater. This further supports the claim that McDonald’s is missing out on an opportunity to enter into a thriving market where the tools such as affordable application development and smartphones are readily available. . To conclude, whilst these recommendations on how McDonald’s should change the way it operates does not guarantee success, it at the very least means that it is competing with its fellow fast-food chains on an even keel. However, there is the possibility that McDonald’s has reached the maturity period of its lifecycle. Like Nokia and Microsoft, two giants in their respective industries, before trendier competitors were introduced to the market, namely Apple, Samsung and Google, no matter how these two giant corporations tried to update their operations and appeal to a newer, more modern market, they have failed to hit the heights of the 1990s. Many of the recommendations are slowly being rolled out by McDonald’s throughout the course of 2015 and will undoubtedly reach the shores of the UK shortly afterwards.

However, McDonald’s is too successful to be judged by a few bad years.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Armstrong, A., (2015) “‘McDonald’s holds global ‘day of joy’ after worst sales in a decade”, The Daily Telegraph, (24th March) [Online] Available at: https://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/newsbysector/retailandconsumer/11491125/McDonalds-launches-day-of-joy-after-worst-sales-in-a-decade.html The Economist (2015a), ‘When the chips are down’, The Economist, (10th January) [Online] Available at: https://www.economist.com/blogs/economist-explains/2015/01/economist-explains-7 The Economist (2015b), ‘Why McDonald’s sales are falling?’ The Economist, (14th January) [Online] Available at: https://www.economist.com/news/business/21638115-after-long-run-success-worlds-largest-fast-food-chain-flounderingand-activist Eurostat (2015), “Unemployment rate by sex and age groups – monthly average %”, [Online] Available at https://appsso.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/nui/show.do?dataset=une_rt_m&lang=en Ferguson, R. (2012), “How Generation Y Will Reshape Customer Loyalty” Born This Way: The UK Millennial Loyalty Survey, London: Aimia Forbes (2015), ‘The World’s Most Valuable Brands’, Available at: https://www.forbes.com/powerful-brands/list/#tab:rank Fortune Magazine (2015), ‘McDonald’s posts a global sales decline as troubles linger’, Fortune Magazine, (February 2015) Gray, R (2015), ‘Generation Y: What Every Marketer Needs to Know’, The Marketer, (2015) HMRC, (2015) ‘Rates and Allowances: Corporation Tax’, HMRC website. (July 2015)(found at Jobber, D., & F.Ellis-Chadwick (2013), Principles and Practices of Marketing, 7th ed. Berkshire: McGraw-Hill Education Kardes, F., M. Cronley, T. Cline, (2014) Consumer Behaviour, Hampshire: Cengage Learning, Macleod, D. (2014) ‘McDonald’s Create Your Taste in Learning Lab Restaurant’, The Inspiration Room, ( 9th October), Martin, L.P. (2012) ‘Targeting Generation Y’, Public Relations Quarterly, 47(2). , pp.46-48 Strauss, W. & N. Howe (2009), Generations: The History of America’s Future 1584-2069, London: Vintage Books) Worthington, I. and C. Britton (2009), The Business Environment, 6th Ed.. Harlow: Pearson Education Ltd.,

Did you like this example?

Cite this page

Why Have McDonald's Sales Been Declining?. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay

College Essay Topics to Write about Internationalization

Introduction

Numerous market entry modes are available for an enterprise, aspiring to internationalise into foreign markets. Entry forms ranges from Exporting, Licensing, Franchising, strategic alliances, joint ventures and wholly owned subsidiaries to foreign direct and indirect investments. However these modes have their own benefits as well as risks attached. The forms of internationalisation discussed here are, exporting, licensing, joint venture and Foreign Direct Investment (FDI).

Forms of Internationalisation

Internationalisation has been defined as “the process of adapting firm's operations to international environments" (Calof and Beamish, 1995, p-116). In other words, it can be explained as involvement of enterprises in to international markets (Welch and Luostarinen, 1999). The existence of internationalisation can be traced back from the initiation of mankind's aptitude to travel overseas in search of different commodities as well as searching new markets for selling products. However today commercial world has taken a massive form and internationalisation has become a spine of modern commercial world (Vijayasri, 2013). The most obvious intention is to target new markets for achieving growth in the business. Enterprises broaden the market for exporting or joint ventures overseas. Several enterprises go overseas to get access to skills and technical know-how. Conventionally, internationalisation by exporting has been regarded as a way to increase growth of firms. However today, internationalisation involves all the activities that a business embarks on with regards to foreign markets for instance, exporting goods and services, licensing, amalgamating with an already existed business, entering in to a joint venture with a foreign company, exhibiting in international trade shows, investing in a foreign country in direct (foreign direct investments) or indirect way (foreign indirect investment or portfolio investment) (Mohibul and Fernandez, 2008).

Exporting

Selling goods and services manufactured in the home country to other markets is defined as exporting (Joshi, 2005). Traditionally it has been considered as the first and foremost move in to an international market which serves as an entry point for expansion in the future (Kogut & Chang, 1996). Although it is considered as an entry strategy, all the sizes of enterprises consider exporting regardless of their position in internationalisation process. Exports benefit the business as it gives the scope for specialisation in the production of those goods and services which it is best suited to produce given the resources in one's own country (natural endowments, labour, skills and technical know-how etc). The key benefit of exporting is that the business can enter as well as exit from the foreign market much easily compared to the complex and resource-seeking forms of internationalisation such as joint venture or foreign direct investment. In other words, there is a less risk, expense and resources involved with exporting compared to other strategies and so it can be executed frequently (Dalli, 1995).

Exporting can be broadly divided in to two categories, direct exporting and indirect exporting (Daniels, Radebaugh and Sullivan, 2007). Direct exporting means direct marketing and selling to the client situated in the foreign market. In a condition where the enterprise has an accessible market in the foreign country, direct exporting can be a viable option as there are several advantages such as sales are controlled, target management is easier, higher profits because of absence of mediators and a closer relationship with the ultimate buyers. However when there is a less familiar environment, risk of exchange rate deterioration and complex regulatory and legal system, makes direct exporting dicey. In that case indirect exporting is a more feasible option (Johanson2000). Indirect exporting make use of mediators to export in to the foreign countries, who then takes charge of searching for buyers, shipping and payments.

The examples of such exporting are generally found in automobiles and transportation industries. However indirect exports can tend to diminishing returns as the mediators try to gain the maximum profit as well as the control over the international market is more or less in the hands of the mediators. Many organisations use both the approaches for different countries. A most celebrated advantage of exports is that it eliminates the cost of producing in the host country. However it can also be taken as a disadvantage if the cost of producing the good is less overseas. From nation to nation there are different rules and regulations pertaining to exports and imports to protect the domestic market such as tariff barrier and import ceilings which make exporting expensive (Hill, 2007). These pitfalls of exporting can be dropped if the exporter hires an experienced mediator (a company or a consultant) and adopts the appropriate strategy.

Licensing

Licensing is an agreement between two parties in which the licensor permits the right over intangible property to licensee for a specific period, and in return, the former collects a loyalty fee from the licensee (Hill, 2007). In other words it is a mode of foreign market entry where an enterprise of one country permits an enterprise in another country to utilise the manufacturing and processing techniques, skills, trademarks, patents etc provided by the licensor. This is a non-equity based transaction. This type of internationalisation is frequent in pharmaceutical companies where licensing for formulas, inventions and patents are exchanged. Beverage manufacturers also frequently license the bottling companies of other countries for producing the beverages. This particular mode of internationalisation is suitable for firms that lack capital for production and familiarity with local markets in foreign country. It can be also recognised as low risk manufacturing relationship (Susman, 2007). However there are some limitations of this mode as well. Licensing controls the enterprise's scope to synchronize strategic moves across the foreign markets by which profits earned in one country (Hill, 2007). Other disadvantages of licensing agreement are the limited control over manufacturing, strategy used for marketing and development and sale of the product. Selling the technical skills to the other businesses evolves a risk of creating competition by providing them the competitive advantage one's own business possesses (Carstairs and Welch, 1982).

Joint Ventures

As the name suggest, a joint venture is an entity created by two or more independent businesses working together with an idea of achieving a common objective, or combining their respective know-how and resources for a superior mutual benefit. Under this mode of internationalisation, the initiating partners (of different countries) create a new entity, participate actively in formulating approaches and decisions making. The enterprises venture to link together sharing profits and expenses, as well as the control of the new firm (Mohibul and Fernandez, 2008). It is equity based method of internationalisation although the combination of equity proportion depends on the agreements of the companies involved in it. The agreement between the parties states the task and kind of participation each company would perform. There are examples of joint venture occurring between businesses that are engaged in a manufacturing of similar products and make profits in similar manner.

For the purpose of saving the cost of research and development of new technologies, the two market competitors Isuzu (Japan based) and General Motors (USA based) have engaged themselves in joint ventures (Automotive News, 2014). The other kind of joint venture takes place between companies which manufacture different products but technologically linked to each other for an instance, the joint product of mobile phones by Sony (Japanese electronics manufacturer) and Ericsson (Swiss telecommunication company). A joint venture can be project based or for a long-term business relationship. Joint ventures can be a beneficial business as enterprises can complement each other's skills and can benefit from the international presence. A company entering in to a joint venture gains from local partner's knowledge of the host country's competitive conditions, culture, language as well as political and business systems.

The companies involved have a joint financial strength and increased access to various resources. Another big advantage is that the costs and risks are shared and all the involved parties would try to minimise them. A business can also overcome some of the cost and risk by offering control of its equity to the other companies involved. In joint venture there is a secured access to other company's technology which can give the market protection. Also there is accumulative learning because of technology and strategies sharing. However, there are certain drawbacks of this mode of internationalisation as well. The first and foremost limitation is that setting up a joint venture can augment a company's exposure to risk than what it would be in a more simple relationship model of paying for the job done by another party. This augmented exposure to risk arises as all the companies are partial equity holder of the venture and there is a greater chance of having a conflict of interests (Hill, 2007).

Foreign Direct Investment (FDI)

The World Bank defines FDI as “Foreign direct investment are the net inflows of investment to acquire a lasting management interest (10 per cent or more of voting stock) in an enterprise operating in an economy other than that of the investor. It is the sum of the equity capital, reinvestment of earnings, other long-term capital, and short-term capital as shown in the balance of payments" In other words. FDI is an investment and getting a controlling ownership in a business by an investor, based in another country for which the foreign investor has control over the company purchased. FDI is different to portfolio investment that is, a passive investments in the share and stocks of a company based in a foreign country which is also called Foreign Indirect Investment (FII). FDI refers to an enterprise's physical investment (in land, building, equipment etc.) in establishing a plant in a foreign country. Enterprises that involve in FDI are often called Multi National Enterprises (MNEs) or Multi National Companies (MNCs).

MNEs usually have two approaches either investing in a new company which are called green field investments or purchasing an existing foreign company by a joint venture or strategic alliance, which is called brown field investment. In addition to the direct capital financing it supplies, FDI can bring valuable technology and know- how. It also encourages linkages with local firms which can help jumpstart an economy as well (Alfaro, 2003). The determinants of FDI can be broadly listed as market size, labour costs and productivity, foreign exchange ratio, political risk, economic policy of the host country, availability of infrastructure, availability of human capital and natural resources, economic growth and tax structure of the host country and saturation at home market (Demirhan and Masca, 2008). Many a times the benefits and limitations of FDI become a subjective matter. This type of internationalisation may provide a MNC with great advantages but at the same time it cannot be advantageous to the host country. Observing from the business point of view, FDI has a direct access in to the host country's market. Some countries have restrictive trade policies; FDI nullifies this for the investor.

In a similar manner FDI is effective mode to acquire scarce natural resources in the foreign country for example oil companies make massive investments in oil rich countries. MNCs benefit tremendously by moving their operations in to a developing country with access to cheap labour, availability of human capital and overall cheap factors of production. The reduced cost of production gives a competitive edge to the business in the international market. Often MNEs selects a particular country for production or assembling as it is closer to final market for their products and by doing so transport and distribution cost can be reduced. Many governments invite and give incentives for the FDIs which are beneficial for the companies which are trying to get hold of an international market. The major demerit of internationalisation through FDI is that, it is highly capital intensive and so there is a higher risk associated with it. For a small and medium scale enterprise FDI can become inaccessible (Westhead,Wright and Ucbasaran, 2007). Further, the exchange rate and political turbulence can adversely affect the FDI business.

Conclusion

An enterprise seeking to enter in an international market must make a strategic decision on the selection of the mode of internationalisation. Above discussed four forms are the most common modes; however the risk appetite of the business is the best indicator to select one or more from them. Indirect export can have minimum risk while FDI can have the maximum risk for an international entry however returns are also set in the same fashion.

References

  1. Alfaro, Laura (2003) Foreign Direct Investment and Growth: Does the Sector Matter? Harvard Business School Papers. Boston, MA. [Online] Available at https://www.people.hbs.edu/lalfaro/fdisectorial.pdf Automotive News (2014) GM and Isuzu to jointly develop midsize pickup for global markets. Dated 26th September, 2014. [Online] Available at https://www.autonews.com/article/20140926/OEM04/140929914/gm-and-isuzu-to-jointly-develop-midsize-pickup-for-global-markets Calof, J. and Beamish P. (1995)
  2. Adapting to foreign markets: Explaining internationalization. International Business Review 4(2):115-131. Carstairs, R.T. and Welch, L. (1982) Licensing and the Internationalization of Smaller Companies: Some Australian Evidence. Management International Review 22 (3): 33-44 Dalli, D. (1995) The organization of exporting activities: relationships between internal and external arrangements. Journal of Business Research (34)2:107-1 15. Daniels, J., Radebaugh, L. and Sullivan, D. (2007) International Business: Environments and Operations (11th Edition). New Jersy, USA: Prentice Hall. Demirhan, E. and Masca, M. (2008)
  3. Determinants of Foreign Direct Investment Flows to Developing Countries: A Cross-sectional Analysis. Prague Economic Papers Vol.-4: 365-369 Hill, C. (2007) International Business: Competing in the Global Marketplace. Irwin: McGraw Hill. Johanson, J. (2000) Global Marketing: Foreign Entry, Local Marketing & Global Management. (2nd edition) Irwin: McGraw Hill. Joshi, R. M. (2005) International Marketing. New Delhi and New York : Oxford University Press. Kogut, B. and Chang, S.J.(1996) Platform Investments and Volatile Exchange Rates: Direct Investment in the U.S. by Japanese Electronic Companies. The Review of Economics and Statistics 78(2): 221-231. Masum, M.I. and Fernandez, A. (2008) Internationalization Process of SMEs: Strategies and Methods.
  4. MA¤lardalen University School of Sustainable Development of Society and Technology VA¤sterAs Sweden [Online] Available at https://www.diva-portal.org/smash/get/diva2:121500/FULLTEXT01.pdf Susman, G. I. (2007) Small and Medium-sized Enterprises and the Global Economy. Northampton, Massachusetts, USA: Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. Vijayasri, G. (2013) The Importance of International Trade in the World. International Journal of Marketing, Financial Services and Management Research 2(9):111-119. Westhead, P. Wright, M. and Ucbasaran, D. (2007) Issues Surrounding the Internationalisation of SMEs: Implications for Policy Makers and Researchers. In: Susman, G. I. (ed.) Small and Medium-sized Enterprises and the Global Economy. Northampton, Massachusetts, USA: Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. Pp- 280-295.
Did you like this example?

Cite this page

College essay topics to write about Internationalization. (2017, Jun 26). Retrieved November 4, 2025 , from
https://studydriver.com/2017/06/page/7/

Save time with Studydriver!

Get in touch with our top writers for a non-plagiarized essays written to satisfy your needs

Get custom essay
Stop wasting your time searching for samples!
You can find a skilled professional who can write any paper for you.
Get unique paper